Cadillac Automobile 2009 DTS User Manual

2009 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M  
OnStar® System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A notice tells about something that can damage the  
vehicle.  
Safety Warnings and Symbols  
A circle with a slash  
through it is a safety  
symbol which means  
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”  
or “Do not let this happen.”  
Notice: These mean there is something that could  
damage your vehicle.  
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the  
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice  
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.  
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use  
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.  
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about  
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore  
the warning.  
Vehicle Symbols  
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols  
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text  
describing the operation or information relating to a  
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.  
{ CAUTION:  
These mean there is something that could hurt  
you or other people.  
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your  
owner manual for additional instructions or information.  
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a  
service manual for additional instructions or information.  
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid  
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Symbol Chart  
+ : Fuses  
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on  
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information  
on the symbol, refer to the index.  
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
j : LATCH System Child Restraints  
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
: : Oil Pressure  
9 : Airbag Readiness Light  
# : Air Conditioning  
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®  
$ : Brake System Warning Light  
" : Charging System  
g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors  
} : Power  
/ : Remote Vehicle Start  
> : Safety Belt Reminders  
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor  
F : Traction Control  
I : Cruise Control  
B : Engine Coolant Temperature  
O : Exterior Lamps  
M : Windshield Washer Fluid  
# : Fog Lamps  
. : Fuel Gage  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Seats and Restraint System  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Head Restraints  
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints  
in the outboard seating positions.  
{ CAUTION:  
With head restraints that are not installed and  
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that  
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a  
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all  
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.  
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint  
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.  
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in  
a crash.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front Seats  
Power Seats  
The power seat  
controls are located  
on the outboard side  
of the seats.  
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the  
head restraint, press the button, located on the top  
of the seatback, and push the restraint down.  
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding  
the control forward or rearward.  
Push down on the head restraint after the button is  
released to make sure that it is locked in place.  
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion  
by moving the front of the control up or down.  
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.  
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion  
by moving the rear of the control up or down.  
The front seats also have power reclining seatbacks.  
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-8.  
On vehicles with the memory feature, memory settings  
can be programmed and recalled for seat positions. See  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Lumbar  
Massaging Lumbar  
The power lumbar  
controls are located  
on the outboard side  
of the front seats.  
On vehicles with this  
feature, the switch is  
located on the outboard  
side of the front seats  
behind the lumbar switch.  
Press the lumbar control forward to increase support  
and rearward to decrease support. Press the top  
or bottom of the control to raise or lower the support  
mechanism.  
Press the switch to turn the massaging lumbar feature  
on. The ignition must be on for this feature to work.  
The massage cycle will run for up to 10 minutes.  
To stop massage, press the massaging lumbar  
switch again or press the power lumbar switch.  
Keep in mind that as a seating position changes,  
as it may during long trips, so should the position  
of the lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Each feature has three temperature settings indicated by  
three lights next to the buttons. The highest setting shows  
three lights, two is medium and one is the lowest.  
Heated and Cooled Seats  
The vehicle may have heated and cooled front seats.  
To operate the heated or cooled seats, the ignition  
must be on.  
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the  
highest setting. Each time the button is pressed, the  
feature will go down one temperature setting.  
The buttons are located  
on the front doors.  
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until  
the display lights turn off.  
If the vehicle has remote vehicle start and it is started  
using the RKE transmitter, the front heated seats will  
be turned on to the high setting if it is cold outside.  
See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry  
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-5. When the key  
is inserted into the ignition and the ignition is turned on,  
this feature will turn off. To turn it back on, press the  
desired button.  
Drive Side Buttons  
shown, Passenger Side  
Buttons similar  
H (Cooled Seat): Press to turn on the cooled seat.  
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the  
heated seat and seatback.  
A light on the button shows the feature is on.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To save positions in memory:  
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering  
Wheel  
1. Adjust the driver seat, including the seatback  
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and  
the steering wheel to a comfortable position.  
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound  
through the driver side front speaker to let you  
know that the position has been stored.  
A second seating, mirror, and steering wheel position  
can be programmed by repeating the previous steps and  
pressing button 2 for a second driver.  
On vehicles with the memory package, the controls are  
located on the driver door panel. The controls are  
used to program and recall memory settings for the  
driver seat, outside mirror, and steering wheel position  
if the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic  
steering feature.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To recall memory positions, the vehicle must be in  
P (Park). Press and release either button 1 or button 2  
corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat,  
outside mirrors, and steering wheel will move to the  
position previously stored for the identified driver.  
You will hear a single beep.  
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any  
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory  
buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power mirror  
buttons.  
If something has blocked the driver seat and/or the  
steering column while recalling a memory position,  
the driver seat and/or the steering column recall may  
stop. If this happens remove the obstruction, then press  
the appropriate control for the area that is not recalling  
for two seconds. Try recalling the memory position again  
by pressing the appropriate memory button. If the  
memory position is still not recalling, see your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
If you use the RKE transmitter to enter the vehicle and  
the remote recall memory feature is on, automatic  
seat and mirror movement will occur. See “MEMORY  
SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization  
on page 3-86 for more information.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy Exit Recall  
Power Reclining Seatbacks  
The control for this feature is located on the driver door  
panel between buttons 1 and 2.  
The seats have power  
reclining seatbacks. Use  
the vertical power seat  
control located on the  
outboard side of the seat.  
With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit position can be  
recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear  
a single beep. The driver seat will move back, and if the  
vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering  
feature, the power telescopic steering column will  
move up and forward.  
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic  
seat and power telescopic steering column movement  
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.  
See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-86 for more information.  
Press the control toward the rear of the vehicle to  
recline the seatback.  
Further programming for automatic seat and steering  
wheel movement can be done using the Driver  
Information Center (DIC). You can select or not  
select the following:  
Press the control toward the front of the vehicle to  
raise the seatback.  
The easy exit recall feature  
The memory seat recall feature  
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-86.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{ CAUTION:  
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in  
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,  
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined  
like this.  
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will  
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front  
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving  
neck or other injuries.  
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,  
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt  
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.  
This could cause serious internal injuries.  
For proper protection when the vehicle is in  
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well  
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.  
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is  
moving.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Center Seat  
Rear Seats  
Heated Seats  
Your vehicle may have heated rear seats.  
To operate the rear heated seats, the ignition must be on.  
The buttons are located on  
the rear doors.  
The vehicle may have a front center seat. This seat  
can be converted to a storage area by lowering  
the seatback. See Center Flex Storage Unit on  
page 2-63.  
I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated  
seatback.  
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the  
heated seat and seatback.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Press a button to turn on the desired feature. A light  
on that button will display to show which feature is on.  
Power Lumbar  
Your vehicle may be equipped with four-way lumbar  
support, without the massage feature, for the outboard  
rear seat positions.  
Each feature has three temperature settings indicated  
by three lights next to the buttons. The highest setting  
shows three lights, two is medium and one is the lowest.  
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at  
the highest setting. Each time you press the button,  
the feature will go down one temperature setting.  
The rear lumbar support  
controls are located on the  
rear doors in front of the  
heated seat buttons.  
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button  
until the display lights turn off.  
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door  
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides  
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear Seat  
Pass-Through Door” under Trunk on page 2-13.  
To turn on the lumbar support feature, press the front of  
the control to increase support or rearward to decrease  
support. The lumbar control can also be moved up  
and down to adjust the location of the support.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Belts  
{ CAUTION:  
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people  
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously  
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any  
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats  
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is  
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.  
This section of the manual describes how to use safety  
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do  
with safety belts.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot  
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your  
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the  
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things  
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the  
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be  
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you  
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten  
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)  
are restrained properly too.  
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the  
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-53  
for additional information.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law  
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:  
Why Safety Belts Work  
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast  
as it goes.  
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have  
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.  
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be  
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not  
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many  
of them, people who buckle up can survive and  
sometimes walk away. Without safety belts, they  
could have been badly hurt or killed.  
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,  
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does  
matter... a lot!  
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat  
on wheels.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Put someone on it.  
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider  
does not stop.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The person keeps going until stopped by something.  
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...  
or the instrument panel...  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Questions and Answers About Safety  
Belts  
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I  
am wearing a safety belt?  
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety  
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious  
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle  
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.  
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are  
upside down.  
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to  
wear safety belts?  
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they  
work with safety belts — not instead of them.  
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants  
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.  
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but  
especially in side and other collisions.  
or the safety belts!  
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.  
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,  
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why  
safety belts make such good sense.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from  
home, why should I wear safety belts?  
This section is only for people of adult size.  
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a  
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and  
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver  
does not protect you from things beyond your  
control, such as bad drivers.  
Be aware that there are special things to know about  
safety belts and children. And there are different  
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be  
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-33  
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-36. Follow  
those rules for everyone’s protection.  
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)  
of home. And the greatest number of serious  
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than  
40 mph (65 km/h).  
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.  
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often  
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.  
Safety belts are for everyone.  
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of  
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in  
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.  
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety  
belt, there is important information you should know.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor  
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be  
worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.  
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic  
bones and you would be less likely to slide under the  
lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on  
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal  
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder  
and across the chest. These parts of the body are  
best able to take belt restraining forces.  
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is  
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too  
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder  
belt should fit snugly against your body.  
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as  
much protection this way.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too  
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap  
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could  
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt  
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just  
touching the thighs.  
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as  
much protection this way.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled  
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt  
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces  
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This  
could cause serious internal injuries. Always  
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.  
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over  
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too  
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The  
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,  
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause  
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes  
under the armrests.  
A: The belt is over an armrest.  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if you wear the  
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your  
body would move too far forward, which would  
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,  
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,  
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You  
could also severely injure internal organs like your  
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over  
the shoulder and across the chest.  
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should  
be worn over the shoulder at all times.  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the  
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would  
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body  
could move too far forward increasing the chance  
of head and neck injury. You might also slide  
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be  
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause  
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should  
go over the shoulder and across the chest.  
A: The belt is behind the body.  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a  
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt  
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make  
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your  
dealer/retailer to fix it.  
A: The belt is twisted across the body.  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder  
except for the center front passenger position  
(if equipped), which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt  
on page 1-31 for more information.  
The following instructions explain how to wear a  
lap-shoulder belt properly.  
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can  
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.  
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.  
Do not let it get twisted.  
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt  
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt  
across you more slowly.  
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,  
check if the correct buckle is being used.  
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt out all  
the way, the child restraint locking feature may  
be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back  
all the way and start again.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.  
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt  
Extender on page 1-32.  
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the  
right front seating position may affect the passenger  
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System  
on page 1-64 for more information.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that  
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if  
necessary.  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,  
move it to the height that is right for you. See  
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this  
section for instructions on use and important safety  
information.  
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.  
The belt should return to its stowed position.  
Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when  
the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should  
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide  
loop on the side wall.  
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the  
shoulder belt.  
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out  
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,  
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.  
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety  
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the  
lap belt on smaller occupants.  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster  
Safety Belt Pretensioners  
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the  
driver and right front passenger position.  
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front  
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt  
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety  
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts  
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal  
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for  
pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle  
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can  
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.  
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt  
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away  
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.  
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could  
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.  
Press the release  
button (A) and move  
the height adjuster to  
the desired position. The  
adjuster can be moved  
up by pushing up on  
the shoulder belt guide.  
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners  
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and  
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety  
After a Crash on page 1-71.  
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added  
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown  
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on  
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions  
the belt away from the neck and head.  
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to  
move it down without pressing the release button  
to make sure it has locked into position.  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position  
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to  
the safety belt:  
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the  
side of the seatback.  
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.  
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the  
guide on top.  
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic  
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide  
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the  
belt into the slots of the guide.  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not  
provide the protection needed in a crash. The  
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.  
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and  
across the chest. These parts of the body are best  
able to take belt restraining forces.  
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as  
described previously in this section. Make sure  
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.  
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the  
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be  
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage  
pocket on the top of the seatback.  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Lap Belt  
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant  
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be  
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.  
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a  
lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-26.  
You vehicle may have a center seating position.  
When you sit in the center front seating position, you  
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.  
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,  
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,  
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.  
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it  
along the belt.  
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is  
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.  
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making  
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.  
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap  
part of a lap-shoulder belt.  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Belt Extender  
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you  
should use it.  
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer  
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,  
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will  
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do  
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it  
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.  
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it  
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the  
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.  
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown  
until the belt is snug.  
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender  
on page 1-32.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned  
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt  
quickly if necessary.  
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the  
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure  
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the  
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for  
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder  
belt until the child passes the below fit test:  
Child Restraints  
Older Children  
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend  
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to  
the booster seat.  
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt  
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try  
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear  
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder  
Belt on page 1-26 for more information. If the  
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,  
then return to the booster seat.  
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,  
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to  
the booster seat.  
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length of  
trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.  
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should  
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.  
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position  
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a  
shoulder belt can provide.  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?  
{ CAUTION:  
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt  
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can  
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face  
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,  
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt  
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should  
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause  
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.  
Never do this.  
Never allow two children to wear the same safety  
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the  
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be  
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety  
belt must be used by only one person at a time.  
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under  
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-26.  
According to accident statistics, children and infants are  
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions.  
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike  
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown  
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety  
belts properly.  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the  
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be  
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder  
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be  
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could  
move too far forward increasing the chance of  
head and neck injury. The child might also slide  
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be  
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause  
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should  
go over the shoulder and across the chest.  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for  
adults and older children, but not for young children  
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system  
nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every time  
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they  
should have the protection provided by appropriate  
child restraints.  
Infants and Young Children  
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes  
infants and all other children. Neither the distance  
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes  
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,  
the law in every state in the United States and in every  
Canadian province says children up to some age must  
be restrained while in a vehicle.  
Children who are not restrained properly can strike  
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a  
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and  
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave  
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow  
children to play with the safety belts.  
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a  
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will  
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during  
a crash. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph  
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly  
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms.  
An infant should be secured in an appropriate  
restraint.  
1-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: (Continued)  
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you  
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the  
right front seat, always move the front passenger  
seat as far back as it will go.  
{ CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Children who are up against, or very close to,  
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured  
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in  
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What are the different types of add-on child  
restraints?  
{ CAUTION:  
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the  
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.  
Selection of a particular restraint should take into  
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,  
and age but also whether or not the restraint will  
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it  
will be used.  
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a  
crash, infants need complete support. This is  
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed and  
its head weighs so much compared with the rest of  
its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing child  
restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash  
forces can be distributed across the strongest part  
of an infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants  
should always be secured in rear-facing child  
restraints.  
For most basic types of child restraints, there are  
many different models available. When purchasing  
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be  
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will  
have a label saying that it meets federal motor  
vehicle safety standards.  
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come  
with the restraint state the weight and height  
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,  
there are many kinds of restraints available for  
children with special needs.  
1-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Child Restraint Systems  
{ CAUTION:  
A rear-facing infant  
seat (A) provides restraint  
with the seating surface  
against the back of  
the infant.  
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that  
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain  
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may  
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,  
the belt would apply force on a body area that is  
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone  
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce  
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,  
young children should always be secured in  
appropriate child restraints.  
The harness system holds the infant in place and,  
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in  
the restraint.  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A forward-facing child  
seat (B) provides restraint  
for the child’s body  
with the harness.  
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to  
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.  
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the  
window.  
1-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the  
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on  
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this  
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,  
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement  
copy from the manufacturer.  
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in  
the Vehicle  
{ CAUTION:  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child  
is in it.  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash  
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the  
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the  
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH  
system, following the instructions that came with  
that child restraint and the instructions in this  
manual.  
Securing the Child Within the Child  
Restraint  
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint  
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems  
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the  
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH  
(LATCH) on page 1-43 for more information. A child can  
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not  
properly secured in the vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash  
if the child is not properly secured in the child  
restraint. Secure the child properly following the  
instructions that came with that child restraint.  
1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to Put the Restraint  
{ CAUTION:  
According to accident statistics, children and infants are  
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system  
or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating  
position.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger  
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the  
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child  
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger  
seat is in a forward position.  
We recommend that children and child restraints be  
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a  
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding  
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in  
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,  
using safety belts.  
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the  
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no  
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that  
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though it is turned off.  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear  
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in  
a rear seat.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 for  
additional information.  
1-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children (LATCH)  
{ CAUTION:  
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving  
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation  
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses  
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child  
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.  
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat  
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags  
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the  
center front seat. It is always better to secure a  
child restraint in a rear seat.  
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is  
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s  
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the  
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the  
instructions in this manual. When installing a child  
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the  
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure  
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be  
installed using only the top tether and anchor.  
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat  
position.  
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating  
position, study the instructions that came with your child  
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.  
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure  
the child restraint properly.  
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you  
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.  
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you  
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its  
attachments. The following explains how to attach a  
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no  
child is in it.  
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have  
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors  
and attachments.  
1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lower Anchors  
Top Tether Anchor  
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.  
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating  
position that will accommodate a child restraint with  
lower attachments (B).  
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint  
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the  
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child  
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle  
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation  
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.  
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a  
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)  
to secure the top tether to the anchor.  
1-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed  
for use with or without the top tether being attached.  
Others require the top tether always to be attached.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing  
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether  
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions  
for your child restraint.  
To assist you in locating  
the lower anchors, each  
seating position with lower  
anchors has two labels,  
near the crease between  
the seatback and the  
seat cushion.  
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one  
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.  
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit  
is available.  
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor  
Locations  
To assist you in locating  
the top tether anchors, the  
top tether anchor symbol  
is located on the cover.  
i (Top Tether Anchor):  
Seating positions with top  
tether anchors.  
j (Lower Anchor): Seating  
positions with two lower  
anchors.  
Rear Seat  
1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The top tether anchors are located under the covers on  
the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the cover to  
access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located  
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See  
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for additional  
information.  
position where the child restraint will be placed.  
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for  
the LATCH System  
{ CAUTION:  
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to  
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect  
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be  
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type  
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use  
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,  
following the instructions that came with the child  
restraint and the instructions in this manual.  
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a  
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that  
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that  
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must  
be attached.  
1-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub  
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage  
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety  
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a  
single anchor. Attaching more than one child  
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor  
or attachment to come loose or even break during  
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To  
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a  
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.  
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt  
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or  
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its  
stowed position, before folding the seat.  
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the  
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have  
lower attachments or the desired seating position  
does not have lower anchors, secure the child  
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.  
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer  
instructions and the instructions in this manual.  
{ CAUTION:  
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired  
seating position.  
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a  
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and  
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any  
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so  
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt  
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if  
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has  
been installed.  
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on  
the child restraint to the lower anchors.  
1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that  
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the  
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.  
Refer to the child restraint instructions and  
the following steps:  
If the position you are  
using has a fixed or  
adjustable headrest or  
head restraint and you  
are using a dual tether,  
route the tether around  
the headrest or head  
restraint.  
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.  
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor cover to  
expose the anchor.  
2.3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head  
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.  
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether  
according to your child restraint instructions  
and the following instructions:  
If the position you are  
using has an adjustable  
headrest or head restraint  
and you are using a  
single tether, route the  
tether under the headrest  
or head restraint and  
If the position you are  
using has a fixed headrest  
or head restraint and  
you are using a single  
tether, route the tether  
over the headrest or  
head restraint.  
in between the headrest  
or head restraint posts.  
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached.  
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear  
Seat Position  
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,  
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child  
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions  
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the  
child restraint when and as the instructions say.  
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,  
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to  
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.  
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see  
page 1-43 for how and where to install the child restraint  
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the  
vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,  
on page 1-43 for top tether anchor locations.  
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed  
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the  
Restraint on page 1-42.  
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top  
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the  
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come  
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be  
anchored.  
1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  
the retractor to set the lock.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that the  
safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.  
1-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child  
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the  
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and  
more information.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety  
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top  
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.  
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Center Front Seat Position  
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the  
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder  
belt back into the retractor. When installing a  
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to  
use your knee to push down on the child restraint  
as you tighten the belt.  
{ CAUTION:  
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat  
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags  
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the  
center front seat. It is always better to secure a  
child restraint in a rear seat.  
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat  
position.  
1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Right Front Seat Position  
{ CAUTION:  
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to  
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to  
Put the Restraint on page 1-42.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger  
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the  
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child  
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger  
seat is in a forward position.  
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system  
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger  
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag  
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing  
Indicator on page 3-55 for more information, including  
important safety information.  
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no  
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that  
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though it is turned off.  
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to  
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear  
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint  
in a rear seat.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 for  
additional information.  
1-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see  
page 1-43 for how and where to install the child restraint  
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a  
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors  
top tether anchor locations.  
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top  
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that  
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions  
that come with the child restraint say that the top  
strap must be anchored.  
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached.  
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the  
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions  
that came with the child restraint.  
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before  
securing the forward-facing child restraint.  
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator  
on the passenger airbag status indicator should  
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.  
page 3-55.  
Position the release button on the buckle so that  
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if  
necessary.  
1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  
the retractor to set the lock.  
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap  
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back  
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing  
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee  
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten  
the belt.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger  
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on  
when the vehicle is started.  
1-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child  
Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on  
page 1-64 for more information.  
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word  
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label  
near the deployment opening.  
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the  
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and  
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle  
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.  
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word  
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest  
to the door.  
Airbag System  
The vehicle has the following airbags:  
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear  
along the headliner or trim.  
A frontal airbag for the driver.  
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.  
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.  
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection  
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags  
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury  
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate  
very quickly to do their job.  
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front  
passenger.  
The vehicle may also have the following airbags:  
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger  
seated directly behind the driver.  
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and  
the passenger seated directly behind the right  
front passenger.  
1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are the most important things to know about the  
airbag system:  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the  
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very  
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be  
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily  
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were  
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.  
Safety belts help keep you in position before and  
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even  
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as  
possible while still maintaining control of the  
vehicle.  
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if  
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you  
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with  
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags  
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some  
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See  
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps  
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the  
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are  
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.  
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety  
belt properly — whether or not there is an  
airbag for that person.  
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the  
door or side windows in seating positions with  
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail  
airbags.  
1-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where Are the Airbags?  
{ CAUTION:  
Children who are up against, or very close to, any  
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or  
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer  
protection for adults and older children, but not for  
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s  
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed  
for them. Young children and infants need the  
protection that a child restraint system can provide.  
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.  
To read how, see Older Children on page 1-33 or  
There is an airbag  
readiness light on the  
instrument panel, which  
shows the airbag symbol.  
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering  
wheel.  
The system checks the airbag electrical system for  
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical  
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-54  
for more information.  
1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar  
The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the  
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.  
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and  
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks  
closest to the door.  
1-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
If something is between an occupant and an  
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it  
might force the object into that person causing  
severe injury or even death. The path of an  
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put  
anything between an occupant and an airbag,  
and do not attach or put anything on the steering  
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag  
covering.  
Do not use seat accessories that block the  
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact  
airbag.  
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar  
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with  
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down  
through any door or window opening. If you do,  
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be  
blocked.  
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right  
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,  
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.  
1-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).  
When Should an Airbag Inflate?  
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to  
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce  
the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s  
or right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they  
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a  
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment  
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is  
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and  
help restrain the occupants.  
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.  
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.  
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle  
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.  
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables  
the sensing system to monitor the position of the  
right front passenger’s seat. The passenger seat position  
sensor and passenger safety belt buckle switch  
provide information that is used to determine if the  
airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full  
deployment.  
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not  
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends  
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,  
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.  
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.  
For example:  
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags  
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the  
vehicle hits a moving object.  
In addition, your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag.  
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to  
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal  
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish  
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe  
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage  
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.  
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.  
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than  
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.  
1-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle also has a dual-depth passenger airbag  
that adjusts the restraint according to crash severity,  
seat location, and safety belt status using electronic  
frontal sensor(s) and other special sensors which enable  
the sensing system to monitor the position of the front  
passenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates to a  
reduced depth when the passenger seat is in a forward  
position. For more rearward front seating positions,  
the passenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth  
(a full deployment), based on safety belt status and  
the crash severity measured early in the event. (Always  
wear your safety belt, even with frontal airbags.)  
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an  
airbag should have inflated simply because of the  
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs  
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by  
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how  
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted  
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is  
determined by the location and severity of the side  
impact.  
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an  
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the  
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the  
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,  
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag  
module.  
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags.  
Your vehicle may have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag  
System on page 1-55. Seat-mounted side impact and  
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate  
to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and  
roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is  
above the system’s designed threshold level. The  
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.  
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the  
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles  
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag  
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the  
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag  
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side  
windows that have occupant seating positions.  
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are  
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal  
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted  
side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of  
the vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will  
deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck.  
1-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How Does an Airbag Restrain?  
What Will You See After an Airbag  
Inflates?  
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,  
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or  
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side  
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside  
of the vehicle.  
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact  
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that  
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.  
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated  
for some time after they deploy. Some components  
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.  
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an  
Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61.  
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety  
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact  
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping  
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact  
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact  
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.  
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you  
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may  
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the  
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent  
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being  
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from  
leaving the vehicle.  
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,  
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not  
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag  
Inflate? on page 1-60 for more information.  
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more  
than a supplement to safety belts.  
1-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,  
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.  
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the  
right front passenger airbag.  
{ CAUTION:  
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the  
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for  
people with a history of asthma or other breathing  
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle  
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you  
have breathing problems but cannot get out of the  
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air  
by opening a window or a door. If you experience  
breathing problems following an airbag deployment,  
you should seek medical attention.  
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an  
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the  
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag  
system will not be there to help protect you in another  
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and  
possibly other parts. The service manual for your  
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.  
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic  
module which records information after a crash.  
page 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.  
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag  
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag  
system will not work properly. See your dealer/  
retailer for service.  
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock  
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the  
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.  
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,  
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the  
controls for those features.  
1-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system turns off the right front  
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side  
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver  
airbags and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the  
passenger sensing system.  
Passenger Sensing System  
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the  
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag  
status indicator will be visible on the overhead console  
when the vehicle is started.  
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that  
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors  
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated  
occupant and determine if the right front passenger  
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag  
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer when  
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child  
restraint for their weight and size.  
United States  
Canada  
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,  
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing  
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child  
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,  
who are large enough, using safety belts.  
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,  
are visible during the system check. If you are using  
remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from  
a distance, you may not see the system check. When  
the system check is complete, either the word ON  
or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.  
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to  
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
1-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off  
the right front passenger airbag and seat-mounted  
side impact airbag if:  
{ CAUTION:  
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the  
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be  
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a  
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously  
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag  
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward  
position.  
The system determines that an infant is present in  
a rear-facing infant seat.  
The system determines that a small child is present  
in a child restraint.  
The system determines that a small child is present  
in a booster seat.  
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of  
the seat for a period of time.  
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),  
no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that  
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual  
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.  
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a  
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown  
child restraints.  
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag  
system or the passenger sensing system.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the  
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted  
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit  
to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger  
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-55.  
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,  
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a  
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as far back  
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint  
in a rear seat.  
1-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on  
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system  
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in  
the right front passenger seat.  
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child  
Restraint  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit:  
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the  
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay  
lit to remind you that the airbags are active.  
1. Turn the vehicle off.  
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.  
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as  
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or  
seat massagers.  
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions  
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and  
Seat Position on page 1-52.  
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle  
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and  
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure  
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child  
restraint into the seat cushion.  
For some children who have outgrown child restraints  
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system  
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal  
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending  
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.  
Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints  
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there  
is an airbag for that person.  
{ CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and  
stays on, it means that something may be wrong  
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to  
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right  
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-54  
for more information, including important safety  
information.  
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped  
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,  
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints  
on page 1-2.  
6. Restart the vehicle.  
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the  
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,  
and check with your dealer/retailer.  
1-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the  
system to detect that person and enable the right front  
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side  
impact airbag:  
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an  
Adult-Size Occupant  
1. Turn the vehicle off.  
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such  
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or  
seat massagers.  
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.  
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on  
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.  
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in  
this position for two to three minutes after the on  
indicator is lit.  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front  
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be  
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.  
1-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Factors Affecting System  
Operation  
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped  
Vehicle  
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the  
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps  
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger  
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in  
the Index for additional information about the importance  
of proper restraint use.  
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.  
There are parts of the airbag system in several places  
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the  
service manual have information about servicing the  
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service  
on page 7-16.  
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or  
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,  
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the  
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend  
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket  
{ CAUTION:  
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific  
Vehicle on page 1-69 for more information about  
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off  
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still  
inflate during improper service. You can be injured  
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid  
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the  
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service  
procedures, and make sure the person performing  
work for you is qualified to do so.  
modifications that can affect how the system operates.  
{ CAUTION:  
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or  
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback  
may interfere with the proper operation of the  
passenger sensing system.  
1-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also  
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing  
system. This could either prevent proper deployment  
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger  
sensing system from properly turning off the  
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing  
System on page 1-64.  
Adding Equipment to Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle  
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change  
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags  
from working properly?  
If you have any questions about this, you should  
contact Customer Assistance before you modify  
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses  
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of  
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.  
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s  
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side  
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from  
working properly. Changing or moving any parts  
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing  
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument  
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner  
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front  
sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring can  
affect the operation of the airbag system.  
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get  
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether  
this will affect my airbag system?  
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.  
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer  
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer  
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See  
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing  
system for the right front passenger’s position, which  
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s  
seat. The passenger sensing system may not  
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced  
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM  
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different  
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat  
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,  
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual  
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,  
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.  
1-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Airbags  
Restraint System Check  
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled  
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag  
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 3-54 for more information.  
Checking the Restraint Systems  
Safety Belts  
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,  
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do  
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are  
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the  
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.  
For the location of the airbag modules, see What  
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61. See your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,  
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and  
anchorages are all working properly.  
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system  
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing  
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn  
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.  
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn  
or frayed, get a new one right away.  
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.  
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-53 for more  
information.  
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety  
Belts on page 5-89.  
1-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being  
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system  
parts.  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the  
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was  
not being used at the time of the crash.  
{ CAUTION:  
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag  
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier  
in this section.  
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your  
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not  
properly protect the person using it, resulting in  
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help  
make sure your restraint systems are working  
properly after a crash, have them inspected and  
any necessary replacements made as soon as  
possible.  
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the  
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light  
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are  
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-54.  
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new  
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?  
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.  
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any  
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your  
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies  
inspected or replaced.  
1-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
1-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Features and Controls  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-22  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys  
{ CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key  
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others  
could be badly injured or even killed. They could  
operate the power windows or other controls or  
even make the vehicle move. The windows will  
function with the keys in the ignition and children  
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the  
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in  
a vehicle with children.  
The master key is used for the driver door, ignition, and  
glove box.  
The valet key is used for the driver door and ignition.  
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,  
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.  
Be sure you have spare keys.  
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System  
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,  
try this:  
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a  
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.  
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far  
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or  
snowy weather.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may  
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the  
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and  
try again.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery  
Replacement” later in this section.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
If the transmitter is still not working correctly,  
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for  
service.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Press to start the engine  
from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.  
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional  
information.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System Operation  
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions  
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.  
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled  
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking  
lamps may flash once to indicate locking has occurred.  
The horn may chirp when Q is pressed again within  
five seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization on  
page 3-86 for additional information.  
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4.  
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.  
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-21.  
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.  
If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining  
doors unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay  
on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.  
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice  
to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-86. Pressing K may disarm  
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content  
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-21.  
With Remote Start  
(Without Remote  
Start Similar)  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for  
about one second to unlock the trunk. The transmission  
must be in P (Park).  
Programming Transmitters to the  
Vehicle  
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will  
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement  
can be purchased and programmed through your  
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is  
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters  
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen  
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter  
is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to  
eight transmitters programmed to it. See RELEARN  
on page 3-68.  
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release  
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and  
the horn sounds three times.  
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to  
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash  
and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.  
The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to  
ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must  
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.  
The vehicle comes with two transmitters.  
Battery Replacement  
Each transmitter will have a number on top of it,  
“1” or “2”. These numbers correspond to the driver  
of the vehicle. For example, the memory seat position  
for driver 1 will be recalled when using the transmitter  
labeled “1”, if enabled through the DIC. See Memory  
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-86 for more  
information.  
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY  
IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC.  
See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under  
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for additional  
information.  
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch  
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static  
from your body could damage the transmitter.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Vehicle Start  
The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to start  
the engine from outside of the vehicle. It also starts  
up the vehicle’s automatic climate control system.  
When the remote start system is active, the climate  
control system will heat and cool the inside of the  
vehicle according to the previous settings of the  
system before turning the vehicle off. The rear window  
defogger will be turned on by the climate control  
system when it is cold outside. If the vehicle has heated  
seats, they will also turn on when it is cold outside.  
See Heated and Cooled Seats on page 1-5 for additional  
information. Cooled seats are not activated during a  
remote start. Normal operation of the climate control  
system will return after the key is turned to ON/RUN.  
See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-40.  
To replace the battery:  
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object  
inserted into the notch, located above the  
metal base.  
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of  
remote starters. For example, some laws may require  
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in  
view when doing so. Check local regulations for  
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.  
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.  
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.  
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.  
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is  
low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.  
4. Reassemble the transmitter.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE  
transmitter functions will have an increased range  
of operation. However, the range may be less while the  
vehicle is running.  
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has  
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine  
is still running, to extend the engine running time  
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended  
one time.  
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless  
additional information.  
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert  
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.  
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off  
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.  
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the  
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.  
To manually shut off a remote start:  
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:  
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.  
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press  
the remote start button until the parking lamps  
turn off.  
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,  
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s  
remote start button until the turn signal lights  
flash or if the vehicle’s lights are not visible,  
press and hold the remote start button for at least  
four seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing  
the remote start button again after the vehicle  
has started will turn off the ignition.  
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
Turn the ignition switch on and then off.  
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate  
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it  
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running that  
may be extended 10 more minutes. If you press and  
release the transmitter lock button and then press and  
hold the remote start button on the RKE transmitter  
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn  
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
again before the first 10 minutes of engine running time  
has expired, 10 minutes are added to the remaining  
minutes. For example, if the lock button and then  
the remote start buttons are pressed again after  
five minutes of the engine run time, 10 minutes are  
added and you now have 15 minutes of engine running.  
The added ten minutes are considered a second  
remote vehicle start.  
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the  
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system  
may be disabled through the Driver Information  
Center (DIC). See “REMOTE START” under DIC  
Vehicle Customization on page 3-86 for additional  
information.  
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36 for important safety  
information when using remote start in a closed  
garage.  
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time  
extension have been used, the vehicle must be started  
with the ignition key before you can use the remote  
start feature again.  
Remote Start Ready  
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start  
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.  
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the  
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature. See your  
dealer/retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer’s  
remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle.  
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the  
key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is  
an emission control system malfunction.  
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if  
the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure  
is too low.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and Locks  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Door Locks  
Outsiders can easily enter through an  
unlocked door when you slow down or stop  
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help  
prevent this from happening.  
{ CAUTION:  
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.  
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.  
Passengers, especially children, can easily  
open the doors and fall out of a moving  
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle  
will not open it. The chance of being thrown  
out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if  
the doors are not locked. So, all passengers  
should wear safety belts properly and the  
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle  
is driven.  
Because the vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,  
you must unlock the doors with the key or  
RKE transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.  
From the outside, use either the key or the  
RKE transmitter.  
From the inside, use the power door lock switches or  
manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs are located  
at the top of the door panel near the window.  
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles  
may be unable to get out. A child can be  
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer  
permanent injuries or even death from heat  
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever  
leaving it.  
Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door.  
To unlock the door, pull up on the knob.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Central Door Unlocking System  
Programmable Automatic  
Door Locks  
The vehicle has a central door unlocking mode.  
When unlocking the driver door, the other doors  
can be unlocked at the same time by turning the  
key clockwise in the door lock cylinder twice.  
The vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are  
closed, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved  
out of P (Park), all the doors will lock. The doors will  
unlock every time the vehicle is stopped and the shift  
lever is moved into P (Park).  
Power Door Locks  
If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is not in  
P (Park), have the person use the manual lock knob  
or power door lock switch. When the door is closed  
again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lock  
knob or power door lock switch to lock the door.  
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are  
located on the front doors.  
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.  
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press  
The door locks can be programmed through prompts  
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
These prompts allow the driver to choose various lock  
and unlock settings. For programming information,  
see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-86.  
to lock the doors.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The rear doors on the vehicle cannot be opened from  
the inside when this feature is in use.  
Rear Door Security Locks  
The vehicle has security locks that prevent passengers  
from opening the rear doors from the inside.  
When you want to open a rear door with the security  
lock on:  
The rear door security locks are located on the inside  
edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors to  
access them.  
1. Unlock the door using the RKE transmitter, the front  
door power lock switch, or by lifting the rear door  
manual lock knob.  
To assist you in finding the lock, the vehicle will have  
one of the following:  
2. Open the door from the outside.  
To cancel the rear door security lock:  
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.  
2. Turn the knob to the horizontal position to  
disengage the lock.  
3. Do the same for the other rear door.  
Lockout Protection  
If the key is in the ignition and the power door lock switch  
is used to lock the doors, all doors will lock and then the  
driver door will unlock. It is always recommended that  
the ignition key is removed from the vehicle when locking  
the doors.  
To use these locks:  
1. Turn the knob to the vertical position to engage  
the lock.  
The lockout protection feature can be overridden by  
holding the power door lock switch for three seconds  
or longer.  
2. Close the door.  
3. Do the same for the other rear door.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Trunk Release  
Trunk  
G (Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunk  
release button is located to the left of the steering  
wheel next to the instrument panel brightness control.  
Press the button to open the trunk. The vehicle must be  
in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the valet lockout switch  
must be off to use this button.  
{ CAUTION:  
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven  
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any  
objects that pass through the seal between the  
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine  
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which  
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause  
unconsciousness and even death.  
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol on  
the RKE transmitter to open the trunk. To disable  
this feature, see Valet Lockout Switch on page 2-20.  
The trunk can be accessed using the Rear Seat  
Pass-Through. See “Rear Seat Pass-Through” following  
this section.  
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or  
trunk/hatch open:  
Close all of the windows.  
Fully open the air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel.  
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting  
that brings in only outside air and set the fan  
speed to the highest setting. See Climate  
Control System in the Index.  
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,  
disable the power liftgate function.  
For more information about carbon monoxide,  
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release  
handle located inside the trunk near the latch. This  
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the  
release handle to open the trunk from the inside.  
Emergency Trunk Release Handle  
Rear Seat Pass-Through  
The vehicle has a small door in the rear seat. This door  
allows access to the trunk from inside the vehicle.  
The rear seat armrest must be down for the  
pass-through door to open. To release the pass-through  
door, move the release up. To close the door, raise it  
and push it until it latches.  
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release  
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing  
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.  
The emergency trunk release handle is only  
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,  
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows  
{ CAUTION:  
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a  
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.  
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and  
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat  
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a  
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows  
closed in warm or hot weather.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The power window  
switches are located on  
the driver door.  
Power Windows  
{ CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is  
dangerous for many reasons, children or others  
could be badly injured or even killed. They could  
operate the power windows or other controls or  
even make the vehicle move. The windows will  
function and they could be seriously injured or  
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.  
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.  
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.  
The front power window switch operates with  
two positions for both up and down movement and the  
rear power window switch operates with one position  
for up and two positions for down movement. Press the  
switch to the first position to lower the window to the  
desired level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.  
When there are children in the rear seat use the  
window lockout button to prevent unintentional  
operation of the windows.  
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
that allows you to use the power windows once  
the ignition has been turned off. For more information,  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express-Down/Up Windows  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override  
Windows with the express feature allow the windows to  
be raised and lowered all the way without holding  
the switch.  
{ CAUTION:  
Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate  
the express feature.  
If express override is activated, the window will not  
reverse automatically. You or others could be  
injured and the window could be damaged.  
Before you use express override, make sure  
that all people and obstructions are clear of the  
window path.  
The express mode can be canceled at any time by  
briefly pressing or pulling the switch.  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature  
If any object is in the path of the window when the  
express-up is active, the window will stop at the  
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.  
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause  
the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to  
normal operation once the obstruction or condition is  
removed.  
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be  
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window  
switch all the way up to the second position. The window  
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the  
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.  
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in  
its path. Use care when using the override mode.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming the Power Windows  
Window Lockout  
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,  
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to  
reprogram each front power window for the express-up  
feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or  
recharge the vehicle’s battery.  
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout button  
is located on the driver door near the window switches.  
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear  
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,  
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows  
still can be raised or lowered using the driver window  
switches when the lockout feature is active.  
To program each front window, follow these steps:  
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,  
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is  
active, close all doors.  
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button  
again. The light on the button will go out.  
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the  
window is fully open.  
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is  
fully closed.  
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately  
two seconds after the window is completely  
closed.  
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process  
for the other windows.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The switch is located on  
the overhead console.  
Sun Visors  
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can  
also be detached from the center mount and moved  
to the side while the auxiliary sunshade remains to  
block the glare from the front. The visors also have  
side-to-side slide capability.  
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror  
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to view the mirror.  
The light will come on when the cover is opened.  
It will go out when you close the cover. If your vehicle  
has the adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up or  
down to brighten or dim the light.  
The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf.  
It only works while the ignition is on or while the Retained  
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained  
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-26.  
Rear Power Sunshade  
To raise the power sunshade, press and release the  
switch. To close the power sunshade, press and release  
the switch again.  
If your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helps to  
reduce the amount of heat and light entering the  
rear window.  
Never store objects on the rear shelf because they  
may get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about in  
your vehicle.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 (Off): Press this side of the button to turn the  
lockout feature off. When the lockout feature is off,  
you can open the trunk using either the keyless entry  
transmitter or the trunk release button located near  
the headlamp switch on the instrument panel.  
Theft-Deterrent Systems  
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.  
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,  
they do not make it impossible to steal.  
— (On): Press this side of the button to turn the lockout  
feature on. When the lockout feature is turned on,  
the trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless entry  
transmitter or the trunk release button located near the  
headlamp switch on the instrument panel.  
Valet Lockout Switch  
The valet lockout switch  
is located inside the  
glove box.  
If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable the  
Universal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.  
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to  
secure your vehicle.  
on page 2-5 and Trunk on page 2-13 for additional  
information.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the  
doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It arms  
only if you use a power door lock with the door open or  
the RKE transmitter.  
Content Theft-Deterrent  
The security light is  
located on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
To avoid arming the alarm by accident:  
Lock the vehicle with the door key or the manual  
door lock.  
Always unlock a door with a key or use the RKE  
transmitter system. Pressing the unlock button  
on the RKE transmitter, or unlocking a door with the  
key disarms the content theft-deterrent system.  
Unlocking a door any other way will activate  
the alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.  
To arm the system:  
1. Open the door.  
2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch with  
the door open or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter. The security light will flash.  
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s  
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm  
by using the unlock button on the RKE transmitter  
system, or by starting the car with a valid key.  
3. Close all the doors. The security light will come on  
and stay on for approximately 30 seconds.  
Changes or modifications made to this system by  
other than an authorized service facility could void  
authorization to use the theft system.  
If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or a  
RKE transmitter the horn will sound and the lamps will  
flash for about 30 seconds.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic  
Immobilizer  
Testing the Alarm  
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then  
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.  
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio  
frequency subject to Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.  
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,  
lock the vehicle using the power door lock or the  
RKE system and close the door. Wait 30 seconds  
until the security lamp goes off.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual  
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and  
the hazard lights will flash.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door  
with your key, using the unlock button on the RKE  
transmitter or by starting the car with a valid key.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to  
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.  
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on  
page 5-95. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,  
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the  
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in  
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic  
Immobilizer Operation  
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized  
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.  
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.  
If the engine does not start and the security light comes  
on when trying to start the vehicle, there may be a  
problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the  
ignition off and try again.  
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to  
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,  
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses  
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95. If the engine still  
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs  
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be  
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the  
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an  
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.  
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”  
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.  
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.  
The following procedure is for programming additional  
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are  
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer  
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to  
have keys made and programmed to the system.  
The system is automatically armed when the key  
is removed from the ignition.  
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is  
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START  
from the LOCK/OFF position.  
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.  
The security light will come on if there is a problem  
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.  
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone  
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from  
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start  
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high  
number of electrical key codes.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut  
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.  
Starting and Operating  
Your Vehicle  
To program the new key:  
New Vehicle Break-In  
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.  
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the  
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not  
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.  
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate  
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if  
you follow these guidelines:  
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to  
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.  
Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or  
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not  
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to  
brake or slow the vehicle.  
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to  
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning  
the original key to LOCK/OFF.  
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles  
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake  
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops  
The security light will turn off once the key has  
been programmed.  
with new linings can mean premature wear and  
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in  
guideline every time you get new brake linings.  
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to  
be programmed.  
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see  
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.  
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing  
a Trailer on page 4-28 for the trailer towing  
capabilities of your vehicle and more  
information.  
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or  
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.  
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be  
gradually increased.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which the  
ignition key can be inserted or removed. This position  
locks the ignition and transmission and steering column.  
Ignition Positions  
The ignition switch has four different positions:  
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off  
center. If this happens, move the steering wheel from  
right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.  
If this doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.  
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio  
and windshield wipers operate while the engine is off.  
To use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.  
C (ON/RUN): This position is where the key returns to  
after the vehicle is started. This position displays some  
of the warning and indicator lights.  
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in  
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the  
engine off. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the  
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.  
In order to shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in the  
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal  
must be applied.  
D (START): This position starts the engine.  
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in  
the ignition could cause damage to the switch or  
break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all  
the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key  
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.  
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER DOOR OPEN  
when the driver door is opened if the ignition is in  
LOCK/OFF, ACC/ACCESSORY and the key is in the  
ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73  
for more information.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
Starting the Engine  
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to  
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:  
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).  
The engine will not start in any other position.  
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already  
moving, use N (Neutral) only.  
Audio System  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
Power Windows  
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle  
is moving. If you do, you could damage the  
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle  
is stopped.  
Sunroof (if equipped)  
Power to these accessories will work up to 10 minutes  
or until the driver’s door is opened. For an additional  
10 minutes of power, close all the doors and turn the key  
to ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF.  
Starting Procedure  
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the  
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of  
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine  
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after  
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission  
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all  
moving parts.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking  
System. This feature assists in starting the  
engine and protects components. If the ignition  
key is turned to the START position, and then  
released when the engine begins cranking, the  
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or  
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not  
start and the key is held in START, cranking will be  
stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking  
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this  
system also prevents cranking if the engine  
is already running. Engine cranking can be  
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the  
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.  
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,  
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or  
18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.  
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to  
the floor and holding it there as you hold the  
key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.  
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to  
allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the  
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.  
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,  
repeat these steps. This clears the extra gasoline  
from the engine. Do not race the engine  
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine  
and transmission gently until the oil warms up and  
lubricates all moving parts.  
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of  
time, by returning the key to the START position  
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat  
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the  
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,  
to let the cranking motor cool down.  
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the  
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts  
or accessories, you could change the way the  
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,  
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the  
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting  
damage would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Coolant Heater  
{ CAUTION:  
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting  
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold  
weather conditions at or below 0°F (18°C). Vehicles  
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged  
in at least four hours before starting.  
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet  
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong  
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause  
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the  
cord into a properly grounded three-prong  
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach,  
use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord  
rated for at least 15 amps.  
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater  
1. Turn off the engine.  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.  
The electrical cord is located on the driver side  
of the engine, behind the transmission dipstick/fluid  
fill location and next to the engine.  
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and  
store the cord as it was before to keep it away  
from moving engine parts and prevent damage.  
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.  
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in  
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in  
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the  
best advice on this.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transmission Operation  
{ CAUTION:  
The automatic transmission may have a shift lever  
located either on the steering column or on the console  
between the seats.  
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift  
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake  
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.  
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is  
running unless you have to. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.  
You or others could be injured. To be sure the  
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly  
level ground, always set the parking brake and  
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into  
Park on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer,  
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.  
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before  
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic  
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully  
apply the regular brakes before you can shift from  
P (Park) while the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you  
cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift  
lever. Push the shift lever all the way into P (Park)  
as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift  
lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park on  
page 2-34.  
There are several different positions for the shift lever.  
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is  
the best position to use when you start the engine  
because the vehicle cannot move easily.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.  
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with  
the engine running at high speed may damage  
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered  
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is  
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.  
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is  
moving forward could damage the transmission.  
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle  
is stopped.  
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides  
the best fuel economy for the vehicle. If you need  
more power for passing, and you are:  
Also use this gear to rock the vehicle back and forth to  
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging the  
Ice, or Snow on page 4-18 for additional information.  
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the  
accelerator pedal about halfway down.  
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the  
accelerator all the way down.  
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not  
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are  
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use  
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.  
The transmission will shift down to the next gear and  
have more power.  
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions  
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of  
Control on page 4-10.  
{ CAUTION:  
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is  
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your  
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could  
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit  
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear  
while the engine is running at high speed.  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Driving the vehicle if you notice that it is  
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase  
speed may damage the transmission. Have the  
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in  
2 (Second) when you are driving less than 35 mph  
(55 km/h) and D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.  
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed more  
than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can use  
2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle speed  
as you go down steep mountain roads, but then  
you would also want to use the brakes off and on.  
Notice: Do not shift into 2 (Second) unless you are  
going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can  
damage the engine and/or transmission.  
D (Drive) can be used for towing. You may want to  
shift the transmission to 3 (Third) or, if necessary, to a  
lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under  
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.  
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even  
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can  
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.  
If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is  
moving forward, the transmission will not shift into first  
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.  
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-28 for more information.  
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal  
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed more than  
D (Drive) without using the brakes. You might choose  
3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,  
winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there is less  
shifting between gears and when going down a  
steep hill.  
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle  
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator  
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will  
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are  
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,  
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on  
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it  
does not, you need to have the vehicle serviced.  
Performance Shifting  
If the vehicle has this feature, it can detect a change in  
driving patterns. If you make an aggressive driving  
maneuver, the vehicle’s transmission automatically  
shifts to the lowest possible gear to maximize vehicle  
performance. The vehicle will automatically return  
to normal operation when you return to normal driving  
patterns.  
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set, the  
ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph  
(8 km/h). The brake light will come on and stay on until  
the parking brake is released. See Brake System  
Warning Light on page 3-56 for more information.  
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake  
pedal down, then push the parking brake pedal down.  
When you lift your foot off the parking brake pedal,  
the pedal will follow your foot to the released position.  
Parking Brake  
The parking brake pedal is  
located to the left of the  
regular brake pedal,  
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can  
overheat the brake system and cause premature  
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure  
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake  
warning light is off before driving.  
near the driver door.  
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,  
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.  
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal  
down, then push the parking brake pedal down.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,  
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on  
page 2-32 for more information.  
Shifting Into Park  
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.  
{ CAUTION:  
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can  
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your  
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).  
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the  
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking  
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have  
left the engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be  
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are  
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.  
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on  
page 4-28.  
Console Shift Lever  
If the vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever,  
use this procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):  
1. Hold the brake pedal down.  
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing the  
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle  
and then to the left.  
3. While keeping the brake pedal applied, set the  
parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32  
for more information.  
Steering Column Shift Lever  
If the vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this  
procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):  
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.  
1. Hold the brake pedal down.  
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can  
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your  
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).  
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the shift  
lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine  
Running  
Torque Lock  
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too  
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.  
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting  
the transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and  
then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent  
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into  
P (Park). To find out how, see “Shifting Into Park” in this  
section.  
{ CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the  
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly  
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the  
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the  
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat  
and even catch fire. You or others could be  
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine  
running.  
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be  
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking  
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).  
Shifting Out of Park  
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock  
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,  
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking  
brake is firmly set before you leave it. See Parking Brake  
on page 2-32 for more information.  
This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.  
The shift lock release is designed to:  
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever  
is in P (Park)  
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of  
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or  
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal  
is applied.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The shift lock is always functional except in the case  
of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)  
battery.  
Column Shift  
If the column shift cannot be moved out of P (Park)  
1. Apply the regular brakes.  
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with  
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.  
See Jump Starting on page 5-38.  
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN or  
ACC/ACCESSORY position. See Ignition  
Positions on page 2-25 for more information.  
Console Shift  
3. Shift out of the P (Park) position to the  
N (Neutral) position.  
If the console shift cannot be moved out of P (Park)  
1. Apply the regular brakes.  
4. Move the column shift to the desired gear.  
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY  
position. See Ignition Positions on page 2-25 for  
more information.  
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),  
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing  
service.  
3. Push the shift lever all the way into P (Park).  
4. Then, shift into the desired gear.  
Parking Over Things That Burn  
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),  
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing  
service.  
{ CAUTION:  
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust  
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park  
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that  
can burn.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Exhaust  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{ CAUTION:  
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been  
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.  
There are holes or openings in the vehicle  
body from damage or after-market  
modifications that are not completely sealed.  
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)  
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to  
CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.  
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected  
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:  
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:  
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation  
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that  
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).  
Drive it only with the windows  
completely down.  
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.  
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or  
different.  
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in  
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building  
that has no fresh air ventilation.  
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion  
or damage.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running the Vehicle While Parked  
{ CAUTION:  
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you  
ever have to, here are some things to know.  
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the  
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in  
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.  
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle  
when the engine is running unless you have to.  
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can  
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.  
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when  
you are on fairly level ground, always set the  
parking brake after you move the shift lever  
to P (Park).  
{ CAUTION:  
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor  
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may  
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon  
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.  
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.  
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has  
no fresh air ventilation. For more information,  
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.  
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not  
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-33.  
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a  
Trailer on page 4-28.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Mirror  
Mirrors  
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.  
Use a soft towel dampened with water.  
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror  
The vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview  
mirror with a compass display. The mirror may also  
have OnStar® controls and Intellibeam™. For more  
information on Intellibeam™, see “Intellibeam Intelligent  
High-Beam Headlamp Control System” under Exterior  
Lamps on page 3-29. For more information about  
OnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 2-51.  
Compass  
Compass Operation  
Press O or AUTO 3 , depending on the vehicle,  
to turn the compass on or off.  
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, after  
a few seconds, the mirror will display the compass  
heading. The compass automatically calibrates as the  
vehicle is driven.  
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation  
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from  
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and  
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is  
started.  
Compass Calibration  
If after a few seconds, the display does not show the  
correct direction, (for example, N for North), there  
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the  
compass. Interference can be caused by a magnetic  
antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a  
similar magnetic item.  
O (On/Off): Press and hold O for about three seconds  
to turn the dimming feature and compass display on  
or off.  
AUTO 3 (Vehicles with Intellibeam™): Press and  
hold for approximately three seconds to turn the  
compass display on or off.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The compass can be placed in calibration mode  
manually by pressing and holding O or AUTO 3 ,  
depending on the vehicle, until a C is shown in  
the compass display.  
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle  
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display  
reads a direction.  
Compass Variance  
The compass is set to zone eight. If you do not  
live in zone eight or drive out of the area, the  
compass variance needs to be changed to the  
appropriate zone.  
To adjust for compass variance:  
1. Find the current location and variance  
zone number on the following zone map.  
2. Press and hold O or AUTO 3 until a zone  
number displays.  
3. Once the zone number displays, press O or  
AUTO 3 repeatedly until the correct zone number  
displays. Stop pressing the button and the mirror  
will return to normal operation. If C appears in  
the compass window, the compass may need  
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed  
previously.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors  
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors  
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:  
Controls for the outside  
power mirrors are located  
on the driver door armrest.  
The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while  
folding.  
They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.  
The mirrors do not stay in the unfolded position.  
The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.  
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror  
controls to reset them to their normal position. A noise  
may be heard during the resetting of the power  
foldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual  
folding operation.  
Mirror Adjustment  
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror  
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving  
position.  
If the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirror  
adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.  
This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on  
the automatic dimming rearview mirror.  
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded  
position.  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Park Tilt Mirrors  
Outside Convex Mirror  
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors,  
it is capable of performing the park tilt mirror feature.  
This feature allows the driver and passenger side  
mirror to tilt to a factory programmed position when  
the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature may be  
useful in allowing you to view the curb when you are  
parallel parking.  
{ CAUTION:  
A convex mirror can make things (like other  
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.  
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could  
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or  
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.  
When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) and  
either a five-second delay has occurred, or the  
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, the driver and  
passenger side mirror will return to its original  
position.  
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex  
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from  
the driver seat.  
This feature can be enabled/disabled through  
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC  
Vehicle Customization on page 3-86 for more  
information.  
Outside Heated Mirrors  
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors.  
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Climate Control  
System on page 3-40 for more information.  
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)  
If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)  
system, see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-45.  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Object Detection Systems  
{ CAUTION:  
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking  
Assist (UFRPA)  
The Ultrasonic Front and Rear Park Assist  
(UFRPA) system does not replace driver vision.  
It cannot detect:  
objects that are below the bumper,  
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too  
close or far from the vehicle  
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking  
Assist (UFRPA) system, it operates at speeds less  
than 5mph (8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking  
and avoiding objects. It can determine how close  
objects are to the front bumper, up to 4 feet (1.2 m)  
in front of the vehicle and the rear bumper, up to  
8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle. The distance sensors  
are located on the front and rear bumper.  
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.  
If you do not use proper care before moving  
forward and while backing; vehicle damage, injury,  
or death could occur. Even with UFRPA, always  
check in front of your vehicle before moving  
forward and behind your vehicle before backing  
up. While moving forward and backing, be sure to  
look for objects and check your vehicle’s mirrors.  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How the System Works  
UFRPA comes on automatically when the shift lever  
is moved out of P (Park). The system does not  
work at a forward or reverse speed greater than  
5 mph (8 km/h).  
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches  
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk level.  
Objects must also be within 4 feet (1.2 m) in front of  
the vehicle and 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper.  
This distance may be less during warmer or humid  
weather.  
When backing up, if objects are detected at the same  
time near both the front and rear bumpers, both  
color-coded light displays will notify you of objects close  
to each bumper. If there are objects detected near both  
bumpers, the beeps will only be sounded to notify that  
objects are close to the rear bumper. However, if while  
the vehicle is backing up and an object comes within  
1 ft (0.3 m) of the front bumper, and at the same time  
there is another object further than 1 ft (0.3 m) from the  
rear bumper, then the beeps will only be sounded to  
notify you of the closer object that is near the front  
bumper.  
Rear Parking Assist  
Display  
Front Parking Assist  
Display  
The front display is located on top of the instrument panel  
to the right of the driver. The front display will have either  
three or six lights to provide distance and system  
information. With Adaptive Cruise control (ACC), it will  
have three lights along with the ACC lights. Without ACC,  
it will have six lights. High-toned beeps from the front  
speakers are for objects detected near the front bumper.  
The rear display is located near the rear window and can  
be seen by looking over your right shoulder. The rear  
display uses three color-coded lights to provide distance  
and system information. Low-toned beeps from the rear  
speakers are for the rear bumper.  
The system can be disabled using the Driver Information  
Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under DIC Operation  
and Displays on page 3-68 for more information.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Moving Forward  
Backing  
When the vehicle is started, the front display will briefly  
illuminate to let you know the system is working.  
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) comes on  
automatically when the shift lever is moved into  
R (Reverse). The rear display will then briefly illuminate  
to let you know the system is working.  
The following describes what will occur with the front  
display as you get closer to a object detected in the  
front of the vehicle:  
The following describes what will occur with the rear  
display as you get closer to an object detected in  
the rear of your vehicle:  
Description  
English  
Metric  
amber/amber lights  
4 ft  
1.2 m  
Description  
amber light  
English  
8 ft  
Metric  
2.5 m  
1.0 m  
0.6 m  
ACC — one amber light  
four amber lights  
ACC — two amber lights  
40 in  
23 in  
1.0 m  
0.6 m  
amber/amber lights  
amber/amber/red lights  
40 in  
23 in  
four amber/ two red lights  
ACC — two amber  
amber/amber/red lights  
flashing and beep for  
five seconds  
lights/one red light  
1 ft  
0.3 m  
four amber/ two red lights  
flashing and beep for  
five seconds  
ACC — two amber  
lights/one red light  
flashing and beep for  
five seconds  
The system can be disabled through the Driver  
Information Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under  
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-68 for more  
information.  
1 ft  
0.3 m  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the System Does Not Seem to  
Work Properly  
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)  
The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)  
system. Read this entire section before using the system.  
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary  
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be  
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on  
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into  
R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:  
The SBZA system operates on a radio frequency  
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Rules and with Industry Canada.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
The driver disables the system.  
The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the  
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,  
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see  
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-90.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or  
an object was hanging out of the trunk during the  
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in  
the rear display. Once the attached object is  
removed, URPA will return to normal operation.  
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.  
The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle  
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.  
Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz  
Other conditions may affect system performance,  
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the  
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.  
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak (0.25V/m  
average) at a distance of 3m  
If the system is still disabled after driving forward at  
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your  
dealer/retailer.  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or  
TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications  
to this equipment. Such modifications could void  
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
{ CAUTION:  
SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not  
replace driver vision. SBZA does not detect:  
Vehicles outside the side blind zones which  
may be rapidly approaching.  
Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.  
Failure to use proper care when changing lanes  
may result in damage to the vehicle, injury, or  
death. Always check the outside and rearview  
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the  
turn signal before changing lanes.  
SBZA Detection Zones  
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately  
one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 11 ft. or  
3.5 m. This zone starts at each side mirror and  
goes back approximately 16 ft. (5.0 m). The height of  
the zone is approximately between 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)  
and 6 ft. (2.0 m) off the ground.  
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind  
zone, amber SBZA displays will light up in the side  
mirrors. This indicates that it may be unsafe to change  
lanes. Before making a lane change, always check  
the SBZA display, check the outside and rearview  
mirrors, look over your shoulder for vehicles and  
hazards, and use the turn signal.  
The SBZA detection zones do not change if the vehicle  
is towing a trailer. So be extra careful when changing  
lanes while towing a trailer.  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information  
on page 3-67 for more information. If the SBZA  
is disabled by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays  
will not light up during normal driving.  
How the System Works  
When the System Does Not Seem To  
Work Properly  
Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal  
circumstances and will increase in wet conditions.  
The system does not need to be serviced due to an  
occasional missed alert. The number of missed  
alerts will increase with increased rainfall or road spray.  
Left Side Mirror  
Display  
Right Side Mirror  
Display  
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays  
will briefly come on to indicate that the system is  
operating. While driving forward, the left or right side  
mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is detected  
in that blind zone. If you activate a turn signal and a  
vehicle has been detected on the same side, the SBZA  
display will flash to give you extra warning not to  
change lanes.  
If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system  
is on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system may  
need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer.  
SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects; however,  
the system may occasionally light up due to guard  
rails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects.  
This is normal system operation, the vehicle does  
not need service.  
SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is  
approaching or passing other vehicles. At speeds  
greater then 20 mph (32 km/h), SBZA displays may  
come on when a vehicle you have passed remains in  
or drops back into the detection zone.  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners  
of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,  
slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions,  
see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-90. If the DIC  
still displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM  
UNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the bumper,  
see your dealer/retailer.  
SBZA Error Messages  
The following messages may appear in the DIC:  
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF:  
This message indicates that the driver has turned the  
system off.  
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE:  
This message indicates that the SBZA system is  
disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot  
detect vehicles in the blind zone. The sensor may be  
blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even  
heavy rainstorms. This message may also activate  
during heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle does  
not need service. For cleaning, see Washing Your  
Vehicle on page 5-90.  
The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attached  
to the vehicle, or a bicycle or object is extending out  
to either side of the vehicle.  
When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the  
driver turning it off, the driver will not be able to turn  
SBZA back on using the DIC. The SIDE BLIND ZONE  
ALERT ON option will not be selectable if the  
conditions for normal system operation are not met.  
Until normal operating conditions for SBZA are met,  
you should not rely upon SBZA while driving.  
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If this  
message appears, both SBZA displays will remain on  
indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.  
If these displays remain on after continued driving,  
the system needs service. Take the vehicle to your  
dealer/retailer.  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
The vehicle may have a Lane Departure Warning (LDW)  
system. Read this entire section before using the system.  
LDW will indicate the system is working whenever  
it detects either the left or right lane marking. So if  
you depart on the side of the lane that LDW is not  
detecting, LDW will not warn you.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you do not carefully maintain your vehicle  
position within the lane, vehicle damage, injury, or  
death could occur. Even with LDW, always keep  
your attention on the road and maintain proper  
vehicle position within the lane. Always keep the  
windshield clean and do not use LDW in bad  
weather conditions.  
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system does  
not steer the vehicle and is only an aid to help you  
stay in your driving lane. The LDW system may not:  
Provide you with enough time to avoid a lane  
change collision.  
Be loud enough for you to hear the warning  
beeps.  
Work properly under bad weather conditions  
or if the windshield is not kept clean.  
When the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking, the  
LDW symbol will flash and you will hear three beeps.  
LDW will not warn you if the turn signal is on or if  
you make a sharp maneuver. Before making a lane  
change, check the vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your  
shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and start the  
turn signal before changing lanes.  
Detect lane markings and will not detect  
road edges.  
Warn you that your vehicle is crossing a lane  
marking if the system does not detect the lane  
marking.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LDW only operates at speeds of 35 mph (56 km) or  
greater. If LDW is turned on when traveling at these  
speeds, the LDW symbol will appear green if the system  
detects a left or right lane marking. This symbol will  
change to amber and flash and three beeps will sound if  
you cross a detected lane marking without using the  
turn signal.  
How the System Works  
LDW uses a camera located between the inside rearview  
mirror and the windshield to detect the lane markings.  
@ (Lane Departure Warning): To turn LDW on and off,  
press the LDW control, located by the exterior headlamp  
control. An indicator on the control will light to indicate  
that LDW is on.  
If the LDW symbol does not appear, LDW is not currently  
operating and will not warn you.  
To change the volume of the warning chime, see Chime  
Volume under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-86  
for more information.  
When the System Does Not Seem To  
Work Properly  
The LDW symbol will not appear when the system is  
having difficulty seeing the lines on the road or if  
the view of the camera on the windshield is blocked  
with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, if the windshield  
is damaged, or when weather limits visibility, such as  
while driving in fog, rain, or snow conditions. This is  
normal operation, the vehicle does not need service.  
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle  
on page 5-90.  
When the vehicle is started, the LDW symbol, located in  
the instrument panel cluster, will briefly come on to  
indicate that the light is operational.  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® System  
LDW warnings may occasionally occur due to tar marks,  
shadows, cracks in the road, or other road imperfections.  
This is normal system operation, the vehicle does not  
need service.  
LDW Error Message  
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM: This message  
may appear in the DIC to indicate that LDW is not  
working properly. If this message remains on after  
continued driving, the system needs service.  
Take your vehicle to your dealer/retailer.  
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live  
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,  
information, and convenience services. If the airbags  
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic  
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request  
emergency services be sent to your location. If the  
keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at  
1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock  
the doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including  
30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on most  
vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service,  
with one trial route, is available on most vehicles.  
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor  
contact Roadside Service.  
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE:  
This message may appear in the DIC if LDW does not  
activate due to a temporary condition.  
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms  
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber  
glove box literature.  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen  
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available  
until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar.  
After the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a  
monthly or annual subscription payment plan. If a  
payment plan is not selected, the OnStar system and all  
services, including airbag notification and emergency  
services, may be deactivated and no longer available.  
For more information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca  
(Canada), or press the OnStar button to speak with  
an advisor.  
OnStar Services Available with the  
Safe & Sound Plan  
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment  
Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)  
(If equipped)  
Link to Emergency Services  
Roadside Assistance  
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance  
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert  
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email  
GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes  
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)  
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.  
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services  
described below, or for a full description of OnStar  
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s  
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or  
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press  
the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor  
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.  
OnStar Services Included with  
Directions & Connections Plan  
All Safe and Sound Plan Services  
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or  
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered  
RideAssist  
Information and Convenience Services  
2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling  
OnStar Virtual Advisor  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar  
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice  
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into  
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid  
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes  
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be  
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or  
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending  
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar  
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit  
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar  
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling  
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).  
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar  
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access  
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and  
stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a  
few simple voice commands to browse through the  
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for  
more information. This feature is only available in the  
continental U.S.  
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls  
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be  
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.  
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-127  
for more information.  
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation  
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial  
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone  
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more  
information.  
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation  
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.  
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor  
locate a business or address and download driving  
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the  
desired destination will play through the audio system  
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more  
information.  
2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Location information about the vehicle is only available  
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and  
available.  
How OnStar Service Works  
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle  
information. This information is automatically sent to  
an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is  
pressed, the emergency button is pressed, or if the  
airbags or AACN system deploy. This information usually  
includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of  
a crash, additional information regarding the crash that  
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction from which  
the vehicle was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of  
OnStar Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also  
sends OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can  
provide services where it is located.  
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,  
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar  
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar  
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing  
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some  
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle  
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or  
wireless phone network congestion.  
Your Responsibility  
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor  
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons  
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.  
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle  
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is  
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and  
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar  
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.  
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a  
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless  
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service  
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where  
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that  
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when  
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible  
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available  
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,  
or at all times.  
2-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Universal Home Remote System  
Operation (With Three Round LED)  
Universal Home Remote  
System  
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to  
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)  
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage  
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote  
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode  
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote  
buttons, follow the instructions below.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
This system provides a way to replace up to three  
remote control transmitters used to activate devices  
such as garage door openers, security systems,  
and home automation devices.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Do not use this system with any garage door opener  
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.  
This includes any garage door opener model  
manufactured before April 1, 1982.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
2-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Read the instructions completely before attempting to  
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,  
it may be helpful to have another person assist with  
programming the transmitter.  
Programming Universal Home  
Remote — Rolling Code  
For questions or help programming the Universal  
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to  
learcar2u.com.  
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter  
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future  
programming. Only the original remote control  
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.  
The programmed buttons should be erased when the  
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing Universal  
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.  
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling  
Code units.  
Programming a garage door opener involves  
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure  
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and  
the procedure will have to be repeated.  
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when  
programming a garage door. Be sure that people and  
objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is  
being programmed.  
To program up to three devices:  
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside  
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,  
and immediately release them.  
2-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold  
the Universal Home Remote button that will be  
used to control the garage door until the garage  
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected  
button, should slowly blink. This button may  
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.  
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button  
when the garage door moves. The indicator light  
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.  
5. Press and release the same button again.  
The garage door should move, confirming  
that programming is successful and complete.  
To program another Rolling Code device such as an  
additional garage door opener, a security device,  
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,  
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than  
what was used for the garage door opener.  
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener  
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”  
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the  
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head  
unit and may be a colored button. Press this  
button. After pressing this button, complete the  
following steps in less than 30 seconds.  
If these instructions do not work, the garage door  
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the  
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code  
garage door opener.  
2-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To program up to three devices:  
Programming Universal Home  
Remote — Fixed Code  
For questions or help programming the Universal  
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to  
learcar2u.com.  
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are  
Fixed Code units.  
Programming a garage door opener involves  
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure  
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out  
and the procedure will have to be repeated.  
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed  
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand  
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of  
the garage door opener motor. If there are a row  
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, the  
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you  
do not see a row of dip switches, return to the  
previous section for Programming Universal Home  
Remote – Rolling Code.  
Your hand held transmitter can have between  
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of  
transmitter.  
2-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)  
could also have a row of dip switches that can  
be used when programming the Universal Home  
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor  
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if  
the dip switch settings are different, use the  
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to  
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor  
head dip switch settings can also be used when  
the original hand held transmitter is not available.  
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions  
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as  
they do in the examples above, but they should  
be similar.  
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter  
could be labeled, as follows:  
A switch in the up position could be labeled as  
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”  
A switch in the down position could be labeled  
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions  
as “Down,” “,” or “Off.”  
A switch in the middle position could be labeled  
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”  
2-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from  
left to right as follows:  
When a switch is in the up position,  
write “Left.”  
When a switch is in the down position,  
write “Right.”  
If a switch is set between the up and down  
position, write “Middle.”  
The switch settings written down in Step 2  
now become the button strokes to be entered  
into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.  
Be sure to enter the switch settings written down  
in Step 2, in order from left to right, into the  
Universal Home Remote, when completing  
Step 4.  
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each  
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s  
Universal Home Remote. You will have  
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three  
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.  
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home  
Remote into programming mode.  
two and one-half minutes to complete Step 4.  
Now press one button on the Universal Home  
Remote for each switch setting as follows:  
If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the  
vehicle.  
If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the  
vehicle.  
If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in  
the vehicle.  
2-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,  
firmly press and release all three buttons at the  
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.  
Reprogramming Universal Home  
Remote Buttons  
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by  
repeating the instructions.  
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to  
control the garage door until the garage door  
moves. The indicator light above the selected button  
should slowly blink. This button may need to be  
held for up to 55 seconds.  
Erasing Universal Home Remote  
Buttons  
7. Immediately release the button when the garage  
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly  
until programming is complete.  
The programmed buttons should be erased when the  
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.  
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the  
Universal Home Remote device:  
8. Press and release the same button again.  
The garage door should move, confirming  
that programming is successful and complete.  
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the  
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until  
the indicator lights, located directly above the  
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.  
To program another Fixed Code device such as an  
additional garage door opener, a security device,  
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing  
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for  
the garage door opener.  
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both  
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.  
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote  
System, call the customer assistance phone number  
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.  
Using Universal Home Remote  
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least  
half of a second. The indicator light will come on while  
the signal is being transmitted.  
2-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Storage Area  
Storage Areas  
To access the front storage area, push down and then  
release. Push up and forward to remove.  
Glove Box  
Lift the glove box handle up to open it. Use the key to  
lock and unlock the glove box.  
Center Console Storage  
If the vehicle has a full floor console it has two storage  
areas. Lift the left lever located in the front of the  
armrest lid to access the upper storage tray. Lift the  
right lever to access the lower storage area. If the  
vehicle has a center seat console it will have two storage  
areas. Press the button located on the front of the  
armrest and lift the armrest cover to access the upper  
storage area. Pull the strap located behind the cup  
holder to access the lower storage area.  
Cupholders  
There are cupholders located in the full floor console,  
or in the front of the center seat console. Cupholders are  
also located in the rear armrest. Slide the cover back  
to access the full floor console cupholder. Fold open the  
front of the console to access the center seat console  
cupholder.  
2-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reinstall the floor mat by lining up the openings in the  
floor mat over the hooks and push it down into place.  
Center Flex Storage Unit  
This vehicle may have a center flex storage unit that  
includes a front center seat with a lap belt and an  
underseat storage compartment. The center seatback  
can also be used as an armrest. Cupholders are also  
located at the front edge of the storage unit and can be  
accessed by folding the compartment forward.  
Properly place the driver’s side floor mat on the floor so  
that it does not block the movement of the accelerator  
pedal.  
Rear Seat Armrest  
Pull the handle rearward to open a storage compartment  
and access the accessory power outlet. Pull out to  
remove.  
This vehicle may have a rear seat center console and  
armrest. Open the console by pushing the button  
and lifting the cover. Inside the console are  
two cupholders that can be pulled out when using.  
When not being used, the center seat lap belt can be  
stored in the underseat storage compartment.  
Convenience Net  
Floor Mats  
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store  
small loads as far forward as possible. The net  
should not be used to store heavy loads.  
The driver’s side floor mat is held in place by two hooks.  
Remove the floor mat by pulling up on the rear of the  
mat to disconnect it from the hooks.  
2-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express Open: The express open feature will operate  
from the closed or partially open position. To express  
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver side  
switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a  
desired position other than to the express-open position,  
press the switch again, in either direction, to stop the  
movement. If the sunshade is in the closed position, it  
will open with the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.  
Sunroof  
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.  
The switches that operate  
the sunroof are located on  
the overhead console.  
Vent Open: From the closed position, press and hold  
the passenger side switch forward to vent the sunroof.  
The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the  
full vent position. The sunshade must be opened  
manually.  
Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controls  
according to one of the following:  
From the open position, press and hold the driver  
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must  
be closed manually.  
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be  
turned to ON/RUN or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
must be active. See Retained Accessory Power  
(RAP) on page 2-26.  
From the vent position, press and hold the  
passenger side sunroof switch rearward.  
2-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light .............................3-58  
Bluetooth® .................................................3-116  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Panel Overview  
Console-Shift Model shown, Column-Shift Model similar  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:  
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-46.  
C. Exterior Lamps on page 3-29.  
O. Hood Release on page 5-11.  
P. Parking Brake on page 2-32.  
Q. Heated Steering Wheel on page 3-7 (If Equipped).  
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-51.  
E. Horn on page 3-6.  
Control on page 3-19.  
(If Equipped).  
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-127.  
on page 2-42 and Adaptive Cruise Control on  
page 3-19 (If Equipped).  
T. Dual Climate Control System on page 3-40.  
U. Traction Control System Button (Console-Shift  
on page 4-6.  
H. Analog Clock on page 3-39.  
I. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
J. Audio System(s) on page 3-95.  
on page 2-29.  
K. Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on page 2-13.  
L. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-34.  
W. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-38.  
X. Glove Box on page 2-62. Valet Lockout Switch on  
page 2-20.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
Tilt Wheel  
A tilt wheel lets the steering wheel position be adjusted.  
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button  
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and  
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns  
others that you are having trouble.  
The adjustment lever is  
located on the left side of  
the steering column.  
Press | again to turn the flashers off.  
Horn  
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering  
wheel pad to sound the horn.  
Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up or down.  
Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic  
Steering Column  
Heated Steering Wheel  
The vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.  
The button for this feature  
is located on the steering  
wheel.  
If the vehicle has this  
feature, the power tilt and  
telescope wheel control is  
located on the outboard  
side of the steering column.  
Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. A light  
on the button displays while the feature is turned on.  
Heating will begin in about three minutes.  
Press the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel  
up or down.  
Press the control forward or rearward and the steering  
wheel moves toward the front or rear of the vehicle.  
To set the memory position, see DIC Vehicle  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
An arrow on the instrument  
panel cluster and in the  
outside rearview mirror  
flashes in the direction of  
the turn or lane change.  
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a  
turn. The lever returns automatically when the turn is  
complete. If you momentarily press and release the lever,  
the turn signal will flash 3 times.  
The lever on the left side of the steering column  
includes the following:  
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to  
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is  
complete.  
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
2 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
N : Windshield Wipers  
The lever returns to its starting position when it is  
released.  
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow  
flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb  
may be burned out.  
L : Windshield Washer  
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,  
check the fuse. See Rear Underseat Fuse Block on  
page 5-98.  
_ : Heated Washer Fluid  
Flash-To-Pass Feature.  
Information for these features is on the pages following.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn Signal On Chime  
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)  
System  
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will sound  
and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display  
TURN SIGNAL ON after driving about a mile to remind  
you to turn it off. See DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-73.  
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this  
entire section before using it.  
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and  
with Industry Canada.  
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Push forward to change the headlamps from low  
beam to high. Pull the lever back and then release  
it to change from high beam to low.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
This light on the instrument  
panel cluster will be on,  
indicating high-beam  
usage.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides  
an audible and visual alert if you approach a vehicle too  
quickly that is directly ahead. FCA also provides a visual  
alert with no audible alert if you are following another  
vehicle much too closely. The FCA alert symbol is located  
on top of the instrument panel to the right of the driver.  
FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar to detect a  
vehicle directly ahead, in your path, within a distance of  
328 ft (100 m) and operates at speeds above 20 mph  
(32 km/h).  
The FCA control is located  
on the steering wheel.  
{ CAUTION:  
To enable or disable FCA, press the Adaptive Cruise  
Control button. See Adaptive Cruise Control on  
page 3-19.  
FCA is only a warning system and does not apply  
the brakes. When you are approaching a vehicle  
or object too rapidly or when you are following a  
vehicle too closely that is ahead of you, FCA may  
not provide you with enough time to avoid a  
collision. FCA is not designed to warn the driver  
of pedestrians or animals. Your complete attention  
is always required while driving and you should  
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.  
For more information, see Defensive Driving on  
page 4-2.  
FCA is enabled when the green light on the button is lit.  
FCA is disabled when the indicator light is amber.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alerting the Driver  
{ CAUTION:  
The FCA alert symbol will  
flash and a warning beep  
will sound when driver  
action may be required.  
On winding roads, FCA may not detect a  
vehicle ahead. You could crash into a vehicle  
ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA on winding  
roads.  
When weather limits visibility, such as in fog,  
rain, or snow, FCA performance is limited.  
There may not be enough warning distance to  
the vehicle in front of you. Do not rely on FCA  
in low visibility conditions.  
The alert symbol will flash when:  
Your vehicle is approaching another vehicle too  
quickly.  
Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead of you  
much too closely.  
{ CAUTION:  
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 for more information.  
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise  
Control switch is on. If you press another Adaptive  
Cruise Control button, you might go into cruise  
when you do not want to. You could be startled  
and even lose control. Be careful not to press  
adaptive cruise buttons unless you want to use  
cruise control.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead  
The vehicle ahead symbol, located next to the FCA  
symbol, will only appear when a vehicle ahead of you is  
detected in your path. If this symbol does not appear,  
or disappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles  
you may see ahead. The symbol may disappear on  
curves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when another  
vehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCA system  
will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in your  
driving lane.  
{ CAUTION:  
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to  
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other objects  
ahead of you. You could crash into an object ahead  
of you. Do not rely on FCA when approaching  
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other objects.  
Unnecessary Alerts  
{ CAUTION:  
FCA may occasionally provide alerts that you consider  
unnecessary. It could respond to a turning vehicle  
ahead of you, guard rails, signs, and other stationary  
objects. This is normal operation, your vehicle does not  
need service.  
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked  
by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicle  
ahead. FCA may not help you avoid a collision  
under these conditions. Do not use FCA when the  
radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your  
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System” under  
Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Messages  
Windshield Wipers  
There are three messages that may appear on the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN  
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE  
on page 3-73.  
Turn the band with the wiper symbol on it to control the  
windshield wipers.  
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, hold it on mist  
until the wipers start, then release. The wipers stop after  
one wipe. For more wipe cycles, hold the band longer.  
Cleaning the System  
6 (Delay): Use to set the delay time between wipe  
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.  
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean  
the lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive  
Cruise Control on page 3-19.  
cycles. The wiper speed can be set for a long or short  
delay between wipes. The closer the band is set to  
the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.  
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.  
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping.  
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.  
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before  
using them. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
carefully loosen or thaw them. If they become worn  
or damaged, replace with new blades or blade inserts.  
Flash-to-Pass  
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to  
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.  
The flash-to-pass feature will only work with the  
headlamps on. It does not work with Daytime  
Running Lamps (DRL).  
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use.  
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.  
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.  
If the headlamps are on low beam, pulling the turn signal  
towards you will flash the high beams.  
The vehicle has wiper-activated headlamps. After the  
windshield wipers have completed eight wipe cycles  
within four minutes, the headlamps automatically turn on.  
See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-32 for more  
information.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
wipes. The highest sensitivity setting, level five is closest  
to low. A single wipe occurs each time the wiper stalk is  
turned to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that the  
sensitivity level has been increased.  
Rainsense™ II Wipers  
For vehicles with this feature, the moisture sensor is  
mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the  
rearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate the  
wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up  
on the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the  
windshield depending on driving conditions and the  
sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will  
occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more  
frequently. The Rainsense II wipers operate in a delay  
mode as well as a continuous low or high speed as  
needed. If the system is left on for long periods of time,  
occasional wipes may occur without any moisture on  
the windshield. This is normal and indicates that the  
Rainsense II system is activated.  
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with  
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers  
off when going through an automatic car wash.  
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are  
not affected by the Rainsense II function. The Rainsense  
II system can be overridden at any time by manually  
turning the wiper band to low or high speed.  
When Rainsense II is active, the headlamps turn on  
automatically. The headlamps will turn off again once the  
wipers turn off if it is light enough outside. If it is dark,  
they remain on. See Wiper Activated Headlamps  
on page 3-32 for more information.  
The Rainsense II system can be activated by turning the  
wiper band to one of the five sensitivity levels indicated  
on the wiper stalk. The position closest to off is the lowest  
sensitivity setting, level one. This setting lets more rain or  
snow to collect on the windshield between wipes. Turning  
the wiper band away from you to higher sensitivity levels  
increases the sensitivity of the system and frequency of  
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on  
the exterior glass surface directly in front of  
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause  
the moisture sensor to malfunction.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
_ (Heated Washer Fluid): The heated windshield  
washer fluid system, if the vehicle has this feature,  
may be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, or bugs  
from the windshield. Slide the control on the turn signal/  
multifunction lever to this position and then release, to  
activate the heated windshield washer fluid system.  
This activation initiates four heated wash/wipe cycles.  
The first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to  
40 seconds to occur, depending on outside temperature.  
After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to  
20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles. The heated  
windshield washer fluid system may be turned off at any  
time by sliding the control on the turn signal/multifunction  
lever to this position again.  
Windshield Washer  
{ CAUTION:  
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until  
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer  
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your  
vision.  
J (Washer Fluid): Press and release this paddle,  
located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever,  
to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers  
will clear the windshield and either stop or return to the  
preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and hold  
the paddle.  
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is  
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,  
steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short  
period of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is a  
normal condition.  
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID will be displayed on  
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the washer  
fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-73.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cruise Control  
{ CAUTION:  
With cruise control, a speed of approximately 25 mph  
(40 km/h) or more can be maintained without keeping  
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work  
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). A cruise control  
light appears in the instrument panel cluster when the  
cruise control is on.  
Cruise control can be dangerous where you  
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do  
not use the cruise control on winding roads or  
in heavy traffic.  
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control  
shuts off.  
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.  
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can  
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose  
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.  
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction  
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the  
cruise control automatically turns off. See Traction  
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. When road  
conditions let you safely use it again, the cruise  
control can be turned back on.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Cruise Control  
I (On): Turns on the cruise control system.  
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the  
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.  
{ CAUTION:  
SET– (Set): Press to set the speed.  
If you leave your cruise control on when you  
are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go  
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be  
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise  
control switch off until you want to use cruise  
control.  
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control.  
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or  
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.  
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.  
The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster comes  
on after the cruise control has been set to the desired  
speed.  
The cruise control buttons  
are located on left side of  
the steering wheel.  
1. Press I .  
2. Get up to the desired speed.  
3. Press the SET– button located on the steering  
wheel and release it.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Press the +RES button. Hold it there until the  
desired speed is reached, and then release  
the button. To increase the vehicle speed in very  
small amounts, briefly press the +RES button  
and then release it. Each time this is done, the  
vehicle accelerates approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed  
and then the brakes are applied. This shuts off the  
cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.  
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph  
(40 km/h) or more, press the +RES (resume/accelerate)  
button to return to the desired preset speed. The cruise  
light displays again.  
The accelerate feature only works after the cruise  
control speed is set by pressing the SET– button.  
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise  
Control  
The vehicle returns to and stays at the preset speed.  
If you press and hold the +RES button, the vehicle  
speed increases until the button is released or the brake  
is applied. Do not hold in the +RES button, if you do  
not want the vehicle speed to increase.  
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed while  
using cruise control:  
Press the SET– button until the lower speed  
desired is reached, then release it.  
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise  
Control  
To slow down in very small amounts, push the  
SET– button briefly. Each time this is done, the  
vehicle slows down approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:  
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher  
speed. Press the SET– button, then release  
the button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle  
now cruises at the higher speed.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passing Another Vehicle While Using  
Cruise Control  
Adaptive Cruise Control  
For vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entire  
section before using it.  
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.  
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle  
slows down to the previous cruise control speed.  
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and  
with Industry Canada.  
Using Cruise Control on Hills  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
How well your cruise control works on hills depends  
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the  
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step  
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed.  
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to  
a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Applying  
the brake or shifting into a lower gear ends cruise control.  
If you need to apply the brake or shift to a lower gear due  
to the grade of the downhill slope, you might not want to  
attempt to use the cruise control feature.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
Ending Cruise Control  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brake  
pedal, or press the cancel button on the steering wheel.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Erasing Speed Memory  
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when  
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.  
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an enhancement  
to traditional cruise control. It allows you to keep  
cruise control engaged in moderate traffic conditions  
without having to constantly reset your cruise control.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ACC uses radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead  
in your path, within a distance of 330 ft (100 m), and  
operates at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). When it  
is engaged by the driver, the system can apply limited  
braking or acceleration of the vehicle automatically  
to maintain a selected follow distance to the vehicle  
ahead. Braking is limited to 0.25 g’s (2.45 m/sec2)  
of deceleration, which is comparable to moderate  
application of the vehicle’s brakes. To disengage ACC,  
apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, the vehicle  
will react like traditional cruise control.  
{ CAUTION:  
On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Control  
may not detect a vehicle ahead. You could  
crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do not use  
Adaptive Cruise Control on winding roads.  
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time  
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a crash  
when you are driving in conditions where  
vehicles may suddenly slow or stop ahead of  
you, enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’s  
path. If you are driving in these conditions, do  
not use Adaptive Cruise Control. The warning  
beep and alert symbol may indicate that you  
are driving in conditions where Adaptive Cruise  
Control should not be used. See “Alerting the  
Driver” in this section.  
{ CAUTION:  
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard braking  
or bring the vehicle to a complete stop. It will not  
respond to stopped vehicles, pedestrians or  
animals. When you are approaching a vehicle or  
object, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time  
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.  
Your complete attention is always required while  
driving and you should be ready to take action  
and apply the brakes. For more information,  
see Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
On slippery roads, fast changes in tire traction  
can cause needless wheel spinning, and you  
could lose control. Do not use cruise control on  
slippery roads.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the  
steering wheel.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
] (On): Press to turn the system on.  
When weather limits visibility, such as when in  
fog, rain, or snow conditions, Adaptive Cruise  
Control performance is limited. There may not  
be enough distance to adapt to the changing  
traffic conditions. Do not use cruise control  
when visibility is low.  
+ Res (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the  
vehicle resume to a previously set speed or to increase  
the set speed when ACC is already active.  
Set– : Press to set the speed or to decrease the set  
speed when ACC is already active.  
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel ACC.  
+GAP (Increase Following Distance): Press to  
increase the distance between your vehicle and other  
vehicles.  
GAP (Decrease Following Distance): Press to  
decrease the distance between your vehicle and other  
vehicles.  
ACC will not work if the master cylinder brake fluid level  
is low.  
The ACCs are located on the steering wheel.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The on symbol is located on the display at the top of the  
instrument panel to the right of the driver. When the on  
symbol is lit on the display, it indicates that ACC is active.  
Engaging ACC With the Set Button  
A message on the DIC will also display when ACC is  
set. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73.  
{ CAUTION:  
Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds,  
and weather conditions when adjusting your set speed.  
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control switch  
on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a  
button and go into cruise when you do not want  
to. You could be startled and even lose control.  
Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until  
you want to use cruise control.  
If the vehicle is in ACC when the traction control system  
begins to limit wheel spin, the ACC will automatically  
disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) on  
page 4-6 and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. When  
road conditions allow you to safely use it again, the ACC  
can be turned back on.  
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the  
speed your vehicle will travel if there is no vehicle  
detected in its path.  
Increasing Set Speed While Using ACC  
There are two ways to increase the set speed:  
To set ACC, do the following:  
Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.  
Press the SET– button and then release the  
button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle  
will now cruise at the higher speed.  
1. Press the ] button.  
2. Get up to the speed desired.  
3. Press in the SET– button and release it.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
Press the +RES button. Hold it there until the  
desired set speed is displayed on the Driver  
Information Center (DIC), then release the switch.  
To increase the set speed in very small amounts,  
move the switch briefly to +RES. Each time this is  
done, the set speed increases by 1 mph (1 km/h).  
Once ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes if  
it detects a vehicle ahead is too close or moving slower  
than your vehicle.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the  
system determines there is not a vehicle in front of you.  
At that point, your vehicle speed will increase to the  
set speed.  
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)  
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will  
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the follow  
distance (gap) you select.  
Decreasing Set Speed While Using ACC  
Use the plus and minus buttons on the steering wheel  
to adjust the follow distance.  
Press the SET– button until you reach the lower speed  
desired, then release it.  
Press the plus button to increase the distance or the  
minus button to decrease the distance. The first button  
press shows the current follow distance setting on  
the DIC. The current follow distance setting will be  
maintained until it is changed.  
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the  
SET– button. Each time this is done, the set speed  
decreases by 1 mph (1 km/h) slower.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
There are six follow distances to choose from.  
Suppose the ACC is set at a desired speed and then  
the brakes are applied. This will turn off the ACC.  
But it does not need to be reset.  
The follow distance selection ranges from near to far  
(one second to two seconds follow time). The distance  
maintained for a selected follow distance will vary based  
on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed the further  
back your vehicle will follow. Consider traffic and weather  
conditions when selecting the follow distance. The range  
of selectable distances may not be appropriate for all  
drivers and driving conditions. If you prefer to travel at  
a follow distance farther than ACC allows, disengage  
the system and drive manually.  
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h)  
or more, press the +RES button. ACC will be engaged  
with the previously chosen set speed.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alerting the Driver  
{ CAUTION:  
The ACC alert symbol is  
located on the display at  
the top of the instrument  
panel to the right of the  
driver.  
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited braking  
ability to slow your vehicle. In some cases, Adaptive  
Cruise Control may not have time to slow your  
vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Be ready to  
take action and apply the brakes yourself.  
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
The alert symbol flashes and a warning beep sounds  
when driver action may be required. If ACC is engaged,  
the alert symbol will flash when:  
Approaching and Following a Vehicle  
ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because you  
are approaching a vehicle too rapidly.  
The vehicle ahead symbol  
is located on the top of the  
instrument panel to the  
right of the driver.  
The vehicle speed drops below about  
20 mph (32 km/h).  
A temporary condition prohibits ACC from operating.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for  
more information.  
A malfunction is detected in the system. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for more  
information.  
The vehicle ahead symbol only appears when a vehicle  
is detected in your path.  
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,  
ACC will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead.  
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked  
by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicle  
ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time  
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.  
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when the  
radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your  
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System” later in  
this section.  
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and  
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or  
other objects ahead of you. You could crash into  
an object ahead of you. Do not use Adaptive  
Cruise Control when approaching stationary  
or slow-moving vehicles or other objects.  
ACC automatically slows your vehicle down when  
approaching a slower moving vehicle. It then adjusts  
your vehicle speed to follow the vehicle in front at the  
selected follow distance. Your vehicle speed increases  
or decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you, but will  
not exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,  
if necessary. When braking is active, your brake lights will  
come on. Braking may feel or sound different than if you  
were applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.  
{ CAUTION:  
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react  
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other  
objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may accelerate  
toward objects, such as a stopped vehicle that  
suddenly appears after the lead vehicle changes  
lanes. Your complete attention is always required  
while driving and you should be ready to take  
action and apply the brakes.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Low-Speed Deactivation  
Curves in the Road  
If your vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while  
following a vehicle ahead, ACC will begin to disengage.  
The Driver Alert symbol will flash and the warning beep  
will sound. The driver must take action since ACC will not  
slow the vehicle to a stop.  
{ CAUTION:  
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in  
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another  
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in  
your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead  
of you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra  
attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes  
if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while  
driving in curves.  
Passing a Vehicle/ACC Override  
To increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the  
accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the system  
will not automatically apply the brakes. A message will  
appear on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-73. Once you remove your foot from the  
accelerator pedal, ACC will return to normal operation  
and be able to apply the brakes, if needed.  
ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It may  
reduce your vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,  
the system will not automatically apply the brakes.  
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.  
Do not rest your foot on the accelerator pedal  
when using Adaptive Cruise Control.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC  
could lose track of the vehicle in your lane and accelerate  
your vehicle. When this happens the Vehicle Ahead  
symbol will not appear.  
ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and  
apply the brakes.  
ACC may, occasionally, provide a driver alert and/or  
braking that you consider unnecessary. It could respond  
to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects when  
entering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation.  
Your vehicle does not need service.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Highway Exit Ramps  
Using ACC on Hills and When Towing a  
Trailer  
{ CAUTION:  
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the  
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set  
speed while entering or on highway exit ramps.  
You could be startled by this acceleration and  
even lose control of the vehicle. Disengage  
Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a highway  
exit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control  
while entering or on exit ramps.  
How well ACC will work on hills and when towing a  
trailer depends on your vehicle’s speed, vehicle load,  
traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills. It may  
not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving on hills.  
When going up steep hills, you may want to use the  
accelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle’s speed. When  
going downhill, especially when towing a trailer, you may  
want to brake to keep your speed down. Applying the  
brake disengages the system. You may choose not to  
use ACC on steep hills, especially when towing a trailer.  
Other Vehicle Lane Changes  
Disengaging ACC  
To turn off the system, apply the brake pedal, press the  
cancel button, or press the ACC button.  
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, ACC will  
not detect the vehicle until it is completely in the lane.  
Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing Set Speed Memory  
Exterior Lamps  
Press the ACC button or turn the ignition off.  
The exterior lamps control  
is located on the instrument  
panel to the left of the  
steering wheel.  
Other Messages  
There are three additional messages that may appear  
on the DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,  
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR.  
These messages will appear to indicate a problem  
on page 3-73 for more information.  
It controls the following systems:  
Headlamps  
Cleaning the System  
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.  
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean  
the lens. Remember, do not use ACC in icy conditions,  
or when visibility is low, such as in fog, rain or snow.  
Taillamps  
Parking Lamps  
License Plate Lamps  
Instrument Panel Lights  
Fog Lamps  
The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.  
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a soft  
cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try to engage the  
ACC. If you are unable to do so, see your dealer/retailer.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The exterior lamps control has four positions:  
IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam  
Headlamp Control System  
O (Off): Turns off the exterior lamps except for  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).  
For vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entire  
section before using it.  
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the  
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the  
following:  
Parking Lamps  
Instrument Panel Lights  
IntelliBeam™  
IntelliBeam is an enhancement to the vehicle’s  
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on  
the rearview mirror, this system turns the vehicle’s  
high-beam headlamps on and off according to  
surrounding traffic conditions.  
The IntelliBeam system turns the high-beam headlamps  
on when it is dark enough, there is no other traffic  
present, and the IntelliBeam system is enabled.  
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps  
together with the following:  
Instrument Panel Lights  
License Plate Lamps  
Taillamps  
Side Marker Lamps  
The parking brake indicator light comes on and stays  
on while the parking lamps are on with the engine  
off and the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.  
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™  
Press and release the IntelliBeam button on the inside  
rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror  
turns on to indicate the system is on. Once the system  
has been turned on, it remains on each time the vehicle  
is started, but the IntelliBeam system must be enabled.  
To enable the IntelliBeam system, turn the exterior lamp  
control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction lever in  
its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light appears on  
the instrument panel cluster when the high-beams are on.  
See Highbeam On Light on page 3-66.  
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together  
with the previously listed lamps. A warning chime sounds  
if the driver’s door is opened while the ignition switch is off  
and the headlamps are on.  
# (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps control to  
turn on the fog lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-34.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving with IntelliBeam™  
The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting  
except AUTO.  
When this occurs, IntelliBeam is disabled until the  
control is turned back to the AUTO position.  
IntelliBeam only activates the high-beams when driving  
over 20 mph (32 km/h).  
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the  
automatic control of IntelliBeam, until any of the  
following situations occur:  
The IntelliBeam system is turned off at the inside  
rearview mirror.  
IntelliBeam might not turn off the high-beams if the  
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because of  
any of the following:  
The system detects an approaching vehicle’s  
headlamps.  
The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.  
The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,  
obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.  
The outside light is bright enough that high-beam  
headlamps are not required.  
The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,  
snow, and/or road spray.  
The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).  
The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due  
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,  
mist, or other airborne obstructions.  
The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the  
high-beam position or the flash-to-pass feature is  
on page 3-9 and Flash-to-Pass on page 3-13.  
Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, or  
obstructed by something that blocks the view of  
the IntelliBeam light sensor.  
When either of these conditions occur, the  
IntelliBeam feature is disabled and the IntelliBeam  
light in the mirror turns off until the high-beam  
stalk is returned to the neutral position.  
Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,  
haze, or other obstructions.  
If IntelliBeam was using low-beams prior to this  
action, the IntelliBeam feature is temporarily disabled  
until the stalk is returned to the neutral position.  
Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of  
the vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeam  
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and  
taillamps.  
You are driving on winding or hilly roads.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You might need to manually disable or cancel the  
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam  
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.  
Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor  
The light sensor is located  
on the inside of the vehicle  
in front of the inside  
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™ at  
the Rearview Mirror  
rearview mirror.  
IntelliBeam can be disabled by using the controls on the  
inside rearview mirror.  
AUTO 3 (On/Off): Press this button on the inside  
rearview mirror to disable the system. The IntelliBeam  
indicator turns off and does not come back on until  
the IntelliBeam button is pressed again.  
When IntelliBeam has turned on the high-beams, pull or  
push the high-beam stalk. This will disable IntelliBeam.  
The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror turns off. To turn  
IntelliBeam back on, press the IntelliBeam button on the  
mirror.  
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using glass  
cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor window.  
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the surface of the  
sensor window.  
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer/  
retailer diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding  
this button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam indicator  
light flashes three times. If you accidentally activate this,  
the vehicle’s setting automatically is reset when the  
ignition is turned off and then on again.  
Wiper Activated Headlamps  
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps  
after the windshield wipers are turned on and have  
completed eight wipe cycles within four minutes.  
When the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, the  
wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off.  
The wiper-activated headlamps also turn off if the  
windshield wipers are turned off.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enough  
outside, the turn signal lamps turn off and normal  
low-beam headlamp operation occurs.  
Headlamps on Reminder  
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control  
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position  
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.  
When automatic lighting is on and it is bright enough  
outside, the regular lamps go off, and the DRL takes over.  
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic  
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once you  
leave the garage, it will take approximately one minute  
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if  
there is light outside. During that delay, the instrument  
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure  
the instrument panel brightness knob is in the full bright  
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-34.  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for  
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.  
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required  
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.  
The DRL system makes the turn signal lamps come on  
when the following conditions are met:  
Turning on automatic lighting or the headlamps will  
deactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps  
were turned on instead, the DRL will still deactivate.  
It is still daylight and the ignition is on.  
The exterior lamp control is in the off position.  
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn off  
automatic lighting and shift the transmission into P (Park).  
Placing the vehicle in P (Park) disables the DRL. The  
DRL will stay off until the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).  
The transmission is not in P (Park)  
(United States only).  
The light sensor is covered or not detecting light.  
See “Sensors” under Dual Climate Control System  
on page 3-40.  
To drive the vehicle with the DRL off, turn off automatic  
lighting and manually turn on the parking lamps or  
fog lamps, if the vehicle has them.  
When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps such as the  
parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRL  
are being used. The instrument panel will not be lit  
up either.  
The regular headlamp system should be turned on  
when needed.  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fog Lamps  
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver  
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty  
conditions.  
If the exterior lamp button has been left on, the exterior  
lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition is  
turned to LOCK/OFF and a door has been opened. This  
protects against draining the battery if the headlamps  
or parking lamps are accidentally left on. If you need to  
leave the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, use the  
exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on after the  
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF and any door is opened.  
The fog lamps button is located on the exterior lamps  
control to the left of the steering column.  
# (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps button to  
turn the fog lamps on or off. A light comes on in the  
instrument panel cluster when the fog lamps are in use.  
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.  
Instrument Panel Brightness  
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,  
the fog lamps will turn off. The fog lamps come back on  
again when the high-beam headlamps are turned off.  
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature  
controls the brightness of the instrument panel and  
footwell lights, if equipped.  
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to  
be on along with the fog lamps.  
The button for this control is located below the exterior  
lamps control.  
Cornering Lamps  
Push the button in and release to extend the button.  
Turn the button clockwise or counterclockwise to  
brighten or dim the lights.  
The cornering lamps come on when the headlamps  
or parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with the  
multifunction lever. They provide more light for cornering.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Courtesy Lamps  
Parade Dimming  
The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner above  
the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning the  
instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or when  
any door is opened and it is dark outside. Puddle lamps  
are located on the bottom of the front and rear door trim.  
This feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays and  
backlighting during daylight hours when the key is in  
the ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature is  
fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness  
outside and the parking lamps are active, the digital  
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel  
brightness knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwise  
to brighten lighting.  
Professional vehicles have an additional dome lamp  
and also opera lamps.  
Entry Lighting  
Reading Lamps  
This feature turns on the courtesy lamps and the  
backlighting for the door switches and the exterior lamp  
control when a door is opened or if the remote keyless  
entry transmitter unlock button is pressed. If activated  
due to the transmitter, the lighting remains active for  
about 40 seconds. Since the entry lighting system  
uses the light sensor, it must be dark outside in order  
for the courtesy lamps to turn on. The courtesy lamps  
turn off approximately 25 seconds after the last door is  
closed. They will dim to off if the ignition key is turned to  
ON/RUN, or immediately deactivate if the power locks  
are activated.  
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console  
on the headliner and in the rear door opening. These  
lamps come on automatically when any door is opened  
and it is dark outside.  
For manual operation, press the button to turn them on.  
Press it again to turn them off.  
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut  
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the  
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical  
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,  
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer  
to clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as  
warm as they usually do and the climate control fan  
may cut back to a lower speed. For more battery  
saving information, see “Battery Saver Active Message”  
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73.  
Footwell Lamps  
For vehicles with footwell lamps, they are located  
under the instrument panel and at the rear of the  
front seats. These lamps provide soft light to the front  
and rear floor areas. They dim with the instrument  
panel cluster lights.  
Footwell lighting brightness can be adjusted with the  
instrument panel brightness control located below the  
exterior lamps control. See Instrument Panel Brightness  
on page 3-34. The footwell lights will turn off before  
the instrument panel lights are at their lowest level of  
brightness.  
Electric Power Management  
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that  
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.  
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and  
extended life of the battery.  
Battery Load Management  
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage  
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.  
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered  
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a  
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver  
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage  
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,  
an alert will be displayed.  
This feature monitors the vehicle’s electrical load and  
determines when the battery is in a heavy discharge  
condition. During times of high electrical loading, the  
engine may idle at a higher revolutions per minute (rpm)  
setting than normal to make sure the battery charges.  
High electrical loads may occur when several of the  
following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,  
rear window defogger, the climate control fan at high  
speeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical  
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.  
This is because the generator (alternator) may not  
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the  
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.  
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver  
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery  
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,  
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the  
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will  
automatically turn off after 10 minutes. Power will be  
restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door or trunk  
is opened, or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on.  
A high electrical load occurs when several of the  
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,  
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at  
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer  
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.  
Battery Run-Down Protection  
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the  
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output  
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine  
idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed.  
It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some  
accessories.  
This feature helps prevent the battery from being  
drained, if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/map  
lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally  
left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they  
automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition  
is off. The lamps will not come back on again until  
one of the following occurs:  
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without  
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of  
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the  
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message  
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,  
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this  
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver  
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-73.  
The ignition is turned on.  
The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on  
again.  
The headlamps will time-out after 10 minutes, if they are  
manually turned on with the ignition on or off.  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible  
to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown  
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem  
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the  
accessory power outlets.  
Accessory Power Outlet(s)  
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in  
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.  
If the vehicle has a center console, the power outlet is  
located inside the lower storage area. There are outlets  
also on the right front lower part of the driver’s seat and  
under the climate control system next to the ashtray.  
See Center Console Storage on page 2-62.  
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the  
vehicle can damage it or keep other components  
from working as they should. The repairs would  
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use  
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating  
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before  
adding electrical equipment.  
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seat  
area located on the door armrests next to the ashtrays.  
There may be a small cap that must be removed to  
access the accessory power outlet. When not using  
the outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.  
Follow the proper installation instructions that are  
included with any electrical equipment you install.  
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause  
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang  
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from  
the plug because the power outlets are designed  
for accessory power plugs only.  
The accessory power outlet can be used at any time.  
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in  
for an extended period of time while the vehicle is  
off will drain the battery. Power is always supplied  
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment  
when not in use and do not plug in equipment  
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ashtray(s)  
Analog Clock  
The analog clock is located on the instrument panel  
above the radio. The clock is not connected with  
any other vehicle system and runs by itself. To adjust  
the clock:  
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items  
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other  
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly  
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items  
in the ashtray.  
1. Locate the adjustment button directly below the  
clock face.  
Front Ashtray  
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance  
the clock hands. Holding the button down will  
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the  
button before reaching the desired time.  
With the full floor console, the ashtray is located below  
the climate control system. To open, push down and  
then release the cover. To clean the ashtray, push  
the lip of the ashtray to remove it. Push the opposite  
side of the ashtray’s lip to install.  
3. Push and release the button to increase the time  
by one minute increments until the desired time is  
reached.  
For vehicles without the floor console, pull the tray  
located below the climate controls to reveal the ashtray.  
The ashtray can be removed by pulling on the ledge  
located at the top of the ashtray.  
Rear Ashtray  
The ashtrays are located on the door armrests.  
To use an ashtray, lift the lid.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Climate Controls  
Dual Climate Control System  
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can  
be controlled with this system.  
Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles with  
Rear Climate Control  
A. Fan Control  
B. Display  
C. Air Delivery Mode  
Control  
D. Driver and  
Passenger  
E. Air Conditioning  
F. Outside Air or AUX  
G. Recirculation  
H. PASS (Passenger  
Climate Control)  
I. Rear Window  
Defogger  
Dual Climate Control System  
Temperature  
Controls  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of  
the instrument panel near the windshield. For more  
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later  
in this section.  
Automatic Operation  
AUTO 9 (Automatic Fan): When this position is  
selected on the fan control, the system adjusts the  
fan speed. If the OnStar® system is activated when  
this position is selected, the climate control fan speed  
will lower.  
After the vehicle is started, the display shows the  
interior temperature settings and the outside  
temperature.  
AUTO (Automatic Mode):  
If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or mode  
control, the system automatically controls the air  
conditioning compressor. The A/C compressor will  
run automatically even at cool outside temperatures  
in order to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicator light  
is lit when the system is operating automatically, even  
1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.  
2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.  
3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting  
between 68°F (21°C) and 78°F (26°C).  
at near freezing outside temperatures. Press # on the  
fan control to turn off the A/C. For improved window  
clearing performance in defog or defrost modes, the  
A/C compressor runs automatically.  
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature  
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool  
any faster. In cold weather, the system will start at  
reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into  
the vehicle until warmer air is available. The system  
starts out blowing air at the floor but may change  
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up to  
maintain the chosen temperature setting. The length  
of time needed to warm the interior depends on the  
outside temperature and temperature of the vehicle.  
h (AUTO RECIRCULATION): If the AUTO position is  
selected on either the fan or mode control, the system  
automatically controls the air inlet to supply fresh outside  
air or recirculate the interior air to cool the car faster.  
The light on the recirculation button will come on when  
the system changes to recirculation. Outside air can be  
forced by pressing h when the light is lit. For vehicles  
without rear climate controls, press : to force outside  
air. The next time AUTO fan or mode is selected, the air  
inlet will reset back to AUTO operation.  
4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to stabilize  
in order for the system to regulate automatically.  
Then adjust the temperature as necessary to  
find your comfort setting.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or  
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.  
Manual Operation  
9 (Off): Turns the entire climate control system off.  
Outside air still enters the vehicle and is directed to  
the floor. The airflow direction and temperature can  
be adjusted, as indicated below.  
Select one of the following:  
AUTO: Turns on the automatic delivery mode operation.  
F (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel  
If the temperature is adjusted while the system is off,  
the display will light to show the current settings.  
outlets.  
* (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument  
panel and the floor outlets. In automatic operation,  
cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer  
air to the floor outlets.  
w x (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Press the  
up or down buttons next to the fan control to manually  
increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.  
w x (Passenger’s Temperature Controls):  
Press the up or down buttons next to the air delivery  
mode control to manually increase or decrease the  
temperature for the front passenger. If the passenger  
climate control system is off, pressing one of these  
buttons turns it on.  
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some  
air directed to the side window outlets and the windshield.  
If recirculation is selected, it only stays on for  
three minutes to reduce windshield fogging.  
W (Floor/Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog  
or moisture. Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some  
air going to the side window outlets and windshield.  
When selected, the system turns off recirculation and  
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside  
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation  
mode cannot be selected while in the floor/defog mode.  
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise  
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turning this  
control completely counterclockwise will turn on the  
automatic fan operation. If the airflow seems low  
when the fan speed is at the highest setting, the  
passenger compartment air filter may need to be  
on page 3-48.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of  
fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield  
and side window outlets. When selected, the system  
automatically turns off recirculation and runs the air  
conditioning compressor, unless the outside temperature  
is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected  
while in the defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle until  
all the windows are clear.  
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation  
mode on or off. An indicator light below the button  
comes on to show that this mode is on. This mode  
recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the  
vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors  
from entering the vehicle. This mode cannot be selected  
while in the defog or defrost modes. If you try to select the  
recirculation mode, the indicator light flashes three times  
and turns off.  
For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flow  
through the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, press the  
AUX button on the front climate control system so that  
the light is not lit.  
Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity  
and cool outside temperatures may result in increased  
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select  
the defrost mode.  
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air  
AUX: For vehicles with a rear climate control system,  
press to turn the rear climate control fan on for automatic  
operation. After the AUX button is pressed, the indicator  
light comes on. Press the button again to turn the  
auxiliary fan off. See Rear Climate Control System  
on page 3-46.  
conditioning system on or off and override the automatic  
system. When in AUTO, the air conditioning compressor  
comes on automatically, as necessary. To avoid window  
fogging on rainy and humid days at temperatures above  
freezing, run the air conditioning.  
PASS (Passenger Climate Control): Press to turn the  
passenger climate control systems on or off. When the  
passenger climate control system is on, the passenger  
temperature setting is displayed. The temperature  
selected by the front passenger also controls the rear  
system air temperature unless the rear seat passengers  
select their own comfort setting.  
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the  
air, so a small amount of water may drip under the vehicle  
while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.  
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode  
on or off. An indicator light comes on to show it is on.  
Air is pulled from outside the vehicle. Pressing ? will  
cancel this mode.  
If the PASS button is pressed to turn the passenger  
temperature setting off, the driver’s temperature knob  
will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Window Defogger  
Sensors  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  
remove fog or frost from the rear window.  
< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn the rear window  
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from  
the rear window as possible. The rear window defogger  
will turn off approximately 20 minutes after the button is  
pressed if the vehicle is moving at slower vehicle speeds.  
At higher vehicle speeds, the rear defogger may stay on  
continuously. Each additional press will run the defogger  
for approximately 10 minutes.  
The heated outside rearview mirrors will turn on to help  
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when  
the rear window defogger is on.  
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middle  
of the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation.  
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not  
work properly.  
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object  
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere  
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.  
These actions may damage the rear defogger.  
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There is also an interior  
temperature sensor  
located next to the steering  
wheel that measures the  
temperature of the air  
inside the vehicle.  
In order to prevent false temperature readings at  
startup, the displayed temperature will not change  
until the following occurs:  
Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 km/h) for  
5 minutes.  
Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 km/h) for  
2 and a half minutes.  
The climate control system uses the information from  
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by  
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air  
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to  
the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation  
mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet  
temperatures.  
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located  
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside  
air temperature and helps maintain the temperature  
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle  
could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Outlet Adjustment  
Rear Climate Control System  
For the front outlets, use the thumbwheel located below  
each outlet to change the direction of the airflow. Use the  
thumbwheel located next to the outlets to shut the airflow  
or to open the outlets and re-direct the air.  
For vehicles with a rear climate control system, the rear  
seat passengers can adjust the direction of the airflow,  
fan speed and temperature for the rear seating area.  
This system also works with the main climate control  
system in the vehicle.  
For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right and up or  
down to change the direction of the airflow.  
Operation Tips  
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air  
inlets at the base of the windshield that may  
block the flow of air into your vehicle.  
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may  
adversely affect the performance of the system.  
Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects  
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more  
effectively.  
The rear climate control system is located on the back  
of the center console.  
C. Temperature Control  
D. Air Delivery Mode  
B. Fan Control  
Control  
A. Display  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUX (Auxiliary): Press the AUX button located on  
the front climate control panel to turn the rear climate  
control system on or off. When turned on the rear system  
operates in automatic mode and the temperature settings  
selected for the front climate control panel will also be  
selected for the rear passengers.  
Automatic Operation  
«A ª (Fan Control): Press until AUTO appears on  
the display to place the system in automatic mode. When  
automatic operation is active, the system automatically  
controls the fan speed. If in auto fan mode, pressing the  
up arrow button will cancel automatic operation and  
places the system in manual mode. If in auto mode,  
pressing the down arrow will turn the rear climate  
control system off.  
To adjust the rear climate control system, the rear  
passenger can select a different temperature, mode  
or fan speed. Whenever the rear passengers have  
adjusted settings on the rear climate control system,  
the AUX light is lit on the front climate control system.  
«N ª (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press until  
AUTO appears on the display to place the system  
in automatic mode. When automatic operation is  
active, the system controls the air delivery mode.  
When the front climate control system is turned off  
or in defrost mode, the rear climate control system is  
turned off. The rear system will turn back on once  
another front mode is selected.  
For more information on how to use the front climate  
control system, see Dual Climate Control System  
on page 3-40. For more information on the air outlets,  
see Outlet Adjustment on page 3-46.  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Operation  
Passenger Compartment Air Filter  
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the  
pollen from the air entering the vehicle. The filter may  
need to be changed periodically. For how often to change  
the passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4.  
«A ª (Fan Control): Press to increase or decrease  
the fan speed.  
« b ª (Temperature Control): Press to increase or  
decrease the temperature for the rear seat passengers.  
Once the rear temperature setting is changed from  
following the front temperature setting, it will no longer  
follow changes to the front temperature setting until  
the front climate control AUX button resets it.  
« N ª (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press these  
buttons to change the air delivery mode. If in AUTO  
air delivery mode, pressing the up arrow button will  
cancel automatic operation and place the system in  
manual mode.  
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the upper outlets.  
% (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the upper outlets  
and the floor outlets.  
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets.  
The access panel for the passenger compartment air  
filter is located under the hood near the windshield,  
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin located on  
the inboard side of the air filter compartment to  
carefully pry the pin out.  
To access the passenger compartment air filter:  
1. Use a tool to remove the cover. If the vehicle has  
tabs that allow the cover to be unlatched with your  
fingers, a tool will not be needed for this step.  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning Lights, Gages, and  
Indicators  
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an  
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to  
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.  
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a  
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some  
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is  
started to indicate they are working.  
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and  
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with  
the vehicle.  
3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between the air  
filter and the compartment wall on the outboard side  
of the vehicle. Then, push in to flatten the pin holding  
the air filter in place. Gently remove the air filter and  
any loose debris that may be inside the air filter  
compartment.  
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on  
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may  
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.  
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be  
costly and even dangerous.  
4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you hear  
a click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap the  
cover into place.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Cluster  
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It show how fast the vehicle is going,  
how much fuel has been used and many of the other things needed drive safely and economically.  
United States version shown, Canada similar  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speedometer and Odometer  
Tachometer  
The speedometer shows the speed in both miles  
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).  
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Operation and Displays  
on page 3-68 for more information.  
This gage indicates  
the engine speed  
in revolutions per  
minute (rpm).  
The odometer mileage can be checked without the  
vehicle running. The vehicle’s odometer works together  
with the driver information center. Trip A and Trip B  
can be set on the odometer. See “Trip Fuel” under  
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-68 for more  
information.  
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the  
new one is set to the correct mileage total of the old  
odometer.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light  
Safety Belt Reminders  
Several seconds after the engine is started, a  
chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front  
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs  
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger  
Sensing System on page 1-64 for more information.  
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument  
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and  
then flashes for several more.  
Safety Belt Reminder Light  
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for  
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety  
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.  
The safety belt light  
comes on and stays on  
for several seconds, then  
flashes for several more.  
This chime and light are  
repeated if the passenger  
remains unbuckled and  
the vehicle is in motion.  
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains  
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver  
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor  
the light comes on.  
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the  
chime nor the light comes on.  
The front passenger safety belt warning light and  
chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such  
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other  
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or  
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the  
safety belt.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Airbag Readiness Light  
{ CAUTION:  
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for  
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates  
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes  
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,  
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.  
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag  
System on page 1-55.  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the  
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it  
means the airbag system might not be working  
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not  
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate  
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have  
the vehicle serviced right away.  
The airbag readiness light  
flashes for a few seconds  
when the engine is started.  
If the light does not come  
on then, have it fixed  
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag  
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come  
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73  
for more information.  
immediately.  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front  
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact  
airbag are enabled (may inflate).  
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator  
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.  
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 for  
important safety information. The overhead console  
has a passenger airbag status indicator.  
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger  
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger  
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.  
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights  
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may  
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing  
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.  
United States  
Canada  
{ CAUTION:  
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status  
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on  
and off, for several seconds as a system check.  
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and  
stays on, it means that something may be wrong  
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to  
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right  
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-54  
for more information, including important safety  
information.  
If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a  
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system check.  
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator  
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,  
to let you know the status of the right front passenger  
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Charging System Light  
Brake System Warning Light  
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two  
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still  
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking both parts  
need to be working.  
This light comes on briefly  
when the ignition key is  
turned to START, but  
the engine is not running,  
as a check to show it  
is working.  
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.  
Have the brake system inspected right away.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer.  
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays  
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem  
with the charging system. A charging system message  
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for  
more information. This light could indicate that there  
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there  
is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away.  
If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the  
light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air  
conditioner.  
United States  
Canada  
This light comes on briefly when the engine is turned  
on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be  
ready to warn if there is a problem.  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning  
light also comes on when the parking brake is set.  
The light will stay on if the parking brake does  
not release fully. If it stays on after the parking brake  
is fully released, it means there is a brake problem.  
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
Warning Light  
For vehicles with  
the Antilock Brake  
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road  
and stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push,  
or the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer  
to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for  
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-26.  
System (ABS), this light  
comes on briefly when  
the engine is started.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light then goes off.  
{ CAUTION:  
The brake system might not be working properly if  
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with  
the brake system warning light on can lead to a  
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has  
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,  
have the vehicle towed for service.  
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the  
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely  
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine  
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or  
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.  
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the  
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the  
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle  
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with  
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on  
page 3-56.  
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),  
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for  
all brake related DIC messages.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Warning Light  
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light  
For vehicles with the  
StabiliTrak® system, this  
light comes on briefly while  
starting the engine.  
This warning light comes  
on briefly while starting the  
engine.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light then goes off.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light will then go off.  
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there  
could be a problem with the StabiliTrak® system and the  
vehicle might need service. When this warning light is  
on, the StabiliTrak® system is off and does not limit  
wheel spin.  
If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there may  
be a problem with the traction control system and the  
vehicle needs service. When this warning light is on,  
the system will not limit wheel spin.  
The light flashes if the system is active and is working  
to assist the driver with directional control of the  
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.  
See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more  
If the traction control system warning light comes on  
and stays on when the system is turned on, the vehicle  
on page 4-6 for more information.  
information.  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When LDW is active, the amber warning symbol comes  
on and flashes. Three beeps sound if a lane marking  
is crossed without using the turn signal. If the warning  
symbol is not on, LDW is not operating and will not  
warn when the vehicle crosses a lane marking.  
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)  
Light  
For vehicles with the lane  
departure warning system,  
this light briefly comes  
on amber, while starting  
the vehicle, to indicate  
that it is working.  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Warning Light  
The engine coolant  
temperature warning  
light comes on when  
the engine is very hot.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the  
indicator light then goes off.  
This light also comes on briefly when the vehicle is  
started.  
When driving at speeds of 35 mph (56 km) or greater  
and LDW is turned on, a green warning symbol appears  
when the system has detected lane markings on at  
least one side of the vehicle.  
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on  
while driving, there may be a problem with the cooling  
system. Driving with engine coolant temperature light  
on could cause the vehicle to overheat, see Overheated  
and Messages on page 3-73 for more information.  
For more information see Lane Departure Warning  
(LDW) on page 2-49.  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage  
Tire Pressure Light  
This gage shows the  
engine coolant  
temperature.  
For vehicles with a tire  
pressure monitoring  
system, this light comes  
on briefly when the engine  
is started.  
It provides information about tire pressures and the  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.  
It indicates when the engine has warmed up and if  
the cooling system is operating properly. If the gage  
pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine coolant  
is too hot and the engine coolant temperature warning  
light comes on. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28  
for more information.  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the Light is On Steady  
Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
Check Engine Light  
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly  
underinflated.  
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board  
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation  
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.  
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for  
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner  
environment.  
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information  
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for more  
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is  
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the  
proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-48 for more  
information.  
This light should come on  
when the ignition is on, but  
the engine is not running,  
as a check to show it  
is working. If it does not,  
have the vehicle serviced  
by your dealer/retailer.  
When the Light Flashes First and  
Then is On Steady  
This indicates that there could be a problem with the  
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about  
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the  
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition  
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60  
for more information.  
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while  
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an  
OBD II problem and service is required.  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before  
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light  
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.  
This system assists the service technician in correctly  
diagnosing any malfunction.  
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of  
two ways:  
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.  
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage  
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis  
and service might be required.  
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with  
this light on, after a while, the emission controls  
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy  
might not be as good, and the engine might not  
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs  
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:  
Reduce vehicle speed.  
Avoid hard accelerations.  
Avoid steep uphill grades.  
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,  
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system  
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original  
tires with other than those of the same Tire  
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s  
emission controls and can cause this light to  
come on. Modifications to these systems could  
lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle  
warranty. This could also result in a failure to pass  
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.  
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being  
hauled as soon as it is possible.  
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,  
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.  
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart  
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous  
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon  
as possible.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Light On Steady: An emission control system  
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.  
Diagnosis and service might be required.  
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.  
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as  
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after  
start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into  
gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or  
stumbling on acceleration. These conditions  
might go away once the engine is warmed up.  
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by  
doing the following:  
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed.  
See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. The diagnostic  
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left  
off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel  
cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.  
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed  
should turn the light off.  
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the  
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of  
the proper fuel to turn the light off.  
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.  
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your  
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer  
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to  
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have  
developed.  
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle  
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.  
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical  
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the  
light off.  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance  
Programs  
Oil Pressure Light  
Some state/provincial and local governments have or  
might begin programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection  
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.  
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass  
an inspection:  
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check  
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the  
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.  
{ CAUTION:  
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the  
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines  
that critical emission control systems have not been  
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle  
would be considered not ready for inspection.  
This can happen if the battery has recently  
been replaced or if the battery has run down.  
The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate  
critical emission control systems during normal  
driving. This can take several days of routine driving.  
If this has been done and the vehicle still does  
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system  
readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the  
vehicle for inspection.  
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.  
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.  
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon  
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.  
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance  
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow  
the maintenance schedule in this manual for  
changing engine oil.  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.  
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally  
the indicator light then goes off.  
Fog Lamp Light  
The fog lamp light comes  
on when the fog lamps  
are in use.  
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil  
is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle  
could be low on oil and it might have some other system  
problem.  
Security Light  
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.  
For information regarding  
this light and the vehicle’s  
security system, see  
on page 2-21.  
See Fog Lamps on page 3-34 for more information.  
Lights On Reminder  
This light comes on  
whenever the parking  
lamps are on.  
See Exterior Lamps on page 3-29 for more information.  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cruise Control Light  
Fuel Gage  
This light comes on  
whenever the cruise  
control is set.  
The fuel gage shows  
approximately how  
much fuel is in the tank.  
It works only when  
the engine is on.  
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned  
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-16 and Adaptive  
Cruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.  
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the  
vehicle the fuel door is on.  
Highbeam On Light  
If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW  
message appears in the Driver Information Center  
and a single chime sounds. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-73 for more information.  
This light comes on when  
the high-beam headlamps  
are in use.  
for more information.  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are a few situations that may occur with the fuel  
gage. All of these situations are normal and do not  
indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:  
Driver Information Center (DIC)  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the status  
of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used  
to display warning/status messages. All messages will  
appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the  
instrument panel cluster, below the tachometer and  
speedometer. The DIC buttons are located on the  
instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.  
At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the  
gage reads full.  
The gage may change when the vehicle is turning,  
stops quickly or accelerates quickly.  
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank  
than the gage indicated. For example, the gage  
may have indicated that the tank was half full,  
but it actually took a little more or less than half  
the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.  
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short  
delay, the DIC will display the information that was  
last displayed before the engine was turned off.  
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle  
system information and the warning/status messages.  
The bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometer  
on the left side. The bottom line of the DIC display  
also shows a digital speedometer on the right side.  
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear  
on the display. Be sure to take any message that  
appears on the display seriously and remember that  
clearing the message will only make the message  
disappear, not correct the problem.  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through  
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-86 for more information on  
the customization features.  
DIC Operation and Displays  
The Driver Information  
Center (DIC) has different  
displays which can be  
accessed by pressing the  
DIC buttons located on  
the instrument panel, to the  
left of the steering wheel.  
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC  
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages  
and clear them from the DIC display.  
y z Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up  
and down the menu items.  
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items  
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items can  
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the  
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items”  
following for more information on these displays.  
be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:  
TRIP A or TRIP B  
These displays show the current distance traveled since  
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)  
or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at the  
same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero  
separately by pressing and holding the set/reset button  
for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer is  
displayed.  
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll  
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle  
Information Display Menu Items” following for more  
information on these displays.  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FUEL RANGE  
INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)  
This display shows the approximate number of  
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive  
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based  
on the current driving conditions and will change if the  
driving conditions change. For example, if you are driving  
in traffic and making frequent stops, the display may read  
one number, but if you enter the freeway, the number  
may change even though you still have the same amount  
of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because different driving  
conditions produce different fuel economies. Generally,  
freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city  
driving.  
This display shows the current fuel economy in either  
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers  
(L/100 km). This number reflects only the fuel economy  
that the vehicle has right now and will change frequently  
as driving conditions change. Unlike average economy,  
this display cannot be reset.  
FUEL USED  
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or  
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.  
To reset this display, press the set/reset button.  
The display will return to zero.  
Once the range drops below an estimated  
40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will show  
FUEL RANGE LOW.  
TIMER ON/OFF  
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can  
record the time it takes to travel from one point to  
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel  
button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.  
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW  
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”  
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for  
more information.  
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until  
TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.  
AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)  
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again  
until TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop and  
display the end timing value.  
This display shows the approximate average miles per  
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).  
This number is calculated based on the number  
of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this  
display was reset. To reset this display, press the  
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.  
To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset button  
after the timer has been stopped. The display will return  
to zero.  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVERAGE SPEED  
Vehicle Information Display Menu  
Items  
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in  
either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).  
This average is calculated based on the various vehicle  
speeds recorded since the last reset of this display.  
To reset this display, press the set/reset button.  
The display will return to zero.  
T (Vehicle Information): The following display  
menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle  
information button:  
OIL LIFE REMAINING  
BATTERY VOLTAGE  
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil  
life remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on  
the display, that means that 99% of the current oil life  
remains.  
This display shows the current battery voltage. If the  
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display.  
For example, the display may read BATTERY VOLTAGE  
13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display will show  
LOW. If the voltage is high, the display will show HIGH.  
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based  
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may  
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.  
This is normal. See Charging System Light on page 3-56  
for more information.  
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL  
SOON message will appear on the display. You should  
change the oil as soon as possible. In addition to the  
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional  
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance  
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-13.  
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,  
the DIC will display a message. See DIC Warnings  
Management on page 3-36 for more information.  
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after  
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not  
to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than  
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset  
accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine  
oil life system, See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.  
The display will show 100% when the system is reset.  
Blank Display  
This display shows no information.  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
turned off. When the SBZA system is turned off, the DIC  
will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF  
message as a reminder that the system has been turned  
off. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 and  
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-45 for more  
information.  
UNITS  
This display allows you to select between English or  
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press  
the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or  
METRIC units.  
PARKING ASSIST  
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES  
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear  
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allows the  
system to be turned on or off. Once in this display, press  
the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF. If you  
choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you choose  
OFF, the system will be turned off. The UFRPA system  
automatically turns back on after each vehicle start.  
When the UFRPA system is turned off and the vehicle is  
shifted out of P (Park), the DIC will display the PARKING  
ASSIST OFF message as a reminder that the system  
has been turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages  
Assist (UFRPA) on page 2-42 for more information.  
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor  
System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be  
viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in  
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).  
Press the vehicle information button until the DIC  
displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.  
Press the vehicle information button again until the  
DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##  
RIGHT ##.  
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by  
the system while driving, a message advising you  
to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in  
the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57  
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for  
more information.  
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT  
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)  
system, this display allows the system to be turned on  
or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to  
select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system  
will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be  
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of  
a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this  
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPEED LIMIT: XXX MPH (SPEED LIMIT:  
XXX Km/h) or ADVISORY: XXX MPH  
(ADVISORY: XXX Km/h)  
RELEARN REMOTE KEY  
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure  
will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,  
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.  
This display will show the speed limit or the advised  
speed as determined by the information on the map disc  
in the navigation system. If there is no map disc in the  
navigation system, this display will not be available.  
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:  
1. Press the vehicle information button until  
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.  
The speed limit and speed advisory displays on the  
DIC are for reference only. There may be segments of  
road where speed data has not been captured or times  
where incorrect speed data, or no speed data, will be  
displayed by the DIC due to the navigation system not  
correctly matching the vehicle’s position to the actual  
road. Be aware of this and obey posted speed limits  
wherever you drive.  
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY  
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.  
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on  
the first transmitter at the same time for about  
15 seconds.  
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first  
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and  
the second will match driver 2.  
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is  
matched.  
SPEED ALERT  
This display will allow you to customize the speed alert  
warning. You can choose to have no warning display,  
or to have it display at the limit, at 5 mph (km/h) over  
the limit, or at 10 mph (km/h) over the limit. The DIC  
will toggle between OFF, AT LIMIT, +5, +10 (MPH or  
Km/h). Press the reset button to make your selection.  
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat  
Step 3.  
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight  
transmitters matched to it.  
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the  
key to LOCK/OFF.  
Blank Display  
This display shows no information.  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE  
DIC Warnings and Messages  
This message displays when the system detects that  
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable  
level. The battery saver system starts reducing certain  
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.  
At the point that the features are disabled, this message  
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the  
charge in the battery.  
These messages appear if there is a problem detected  
in one of your vehicle’s systems.  
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the  
screen for further use. To clear a message, press  
the set/reset button.  
Be sure to take any message that appears on the  
screen seriously and remember that clearing the  
message will only make the message disappear,  
not the problem.  
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery  
to recharge.  
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.  
You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel button until  
BATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed.  
ADVISORY XXX MPH (km/h)  
This message displays when the Speed Alert has been  
turned on through the DIC Information Menu and the  
vehicle is at or above the advised speed. See DIC  
Operation and Displays on page 3-68.  
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON  
This message displays when service is required for  
your vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil  
on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
for more information.  
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF  
This message displays when the automatic headlamps  
are turned off. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-29 for  
more information.  
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON  
message by clearing it from the display, you still must  
reset the engine oil life system separately. For more  
information on resetting the engine oil life system,  
see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.  
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON  
This message displays when the automatic headlamps  
are turned on. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-29 for  
more information.  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE  
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)  
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System  
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in  
one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.  
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT  
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which  
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than  
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other  
messages that may have been sent at the same time,  
press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure message  
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the  
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the  
Tire Loading Information label. See Tires on page 5-48,  
Pressure on page 5-57. The DIC also shows the tire  
pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays on  
page 3-68. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure  
warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on  
page 3-60.  
This message displays whenever the cruise control is  
set. See Cruise Control on page 3-16 and Adaptive  
Cruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.  
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), after  
a few seconds, this message clears and the message  
“SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the DIC.  
See “SET SPD (Speed)” later in this section.  
DRIVER DOOR OPEN  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
CLEAN RADAR  
This message displays when the driver door is not  
closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed  
completely.  
This message displays when the Adaptive  
Cruise Control (ACC) system and the Forward  
Collision Alert (FCA) system are disabled because  
the radar is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in  
your path. It may also activate during heavy rain or  
due to road spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaning  
the System” under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19.  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This message displays when the engine coolant  
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle  
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant  
ENGINE HOT – A/C  
(Air Conditioning) OFF  
This message displays when the engine coolant  
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.  
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air  
conditioning compressor automatically turns off.  
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,  
the air conditioning compressor turns back on.  
You can continue to drive your vehicle.  
page 5-30 for information on driving to a safe place  
in an emergency.  
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine  
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.  
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument  
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon  
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28  
for more information.  
If this message continues to appear, have the system  
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible  
to avoid damage to the engine.  
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE  
This message displays when the engine has overheated.  
Immediately look for a safe place to pull your vehicle  
over and turn the engine off right away to avoid severe  
engine damage. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28  
on page 5-30. A chime also sounds when this message  
is displayed.  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine  
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.  
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument  
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as  
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above  
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating  
on page 5-28 for more information.  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this  
message displays to show the follow distance that has  
been set. There are six follow distances to choose from.  
Each follow distance is shown on the DIC by displaying  
from one to six bars between two car symbols.  
See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19 for  
more information.  
ENGINE POWER REDUCED  
This message displays when the engine power is being  
reduced to protect the engine from damage. There could  
be several malfunctions that might cause this message.  
Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability  
to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no  
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.  
The performance may be reduced the next time the  
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced  
speed while this message is on, but acceleration and  
speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on,  
the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for  
service as soon as possible.  
FUEL LEVEL LOW  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
FOLLOWING GAP  
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.  
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single chime  
sounds when this message is displayed. See Filling the  
Tank on page 5-7.  
This symbol appears with this message.  
3-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE  
This message displays when you manually turn off  
the heated washer fluid system or when the system  
automatically turns off. See “Heated Washer Fluid”  
under Windshield Washer on page 3-15 for more  
information.  
This message displays when the outside temperature  
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM  
UNAVAILABLE  
HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID  
WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING  
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)  
system, this message may display if the LDW system  
does not activate due to a temporary condition.  
for more information.  
This message displays when you turn on the heated  
washer fluid system. See “Heated Washer Fluid” under  
Windshield Washer on page 3-15 for more information.  
HOOD OPEN  
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This message displays when the hood is not closed  
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed  
completely. See Hood Release on page 5-11.  
This message displays when the driver side rear door  
is not closed completely. Make sure that the door  
is closed completely.  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS PEDAL  
APPLIED  
PARKING ASSIST OFF  
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear  
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle is  
shifted out of P (Park), this message displays to remind  
the driver that the UFRPA system has been turned off.  
Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this message  
and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the UFRPA  
system back on, see “PARKING ASSIST” under DIC  
for more information.  
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise  
Control (ACC) is engaged and you are pressing the  
accelerator pedal enough to disable ACC automatic  
braking. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19  
for more information.  
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine  
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may  
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on  
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the  
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle  
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.  
See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.  
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine  
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears  
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure  
Light on page 3-64.  
A multiple chime sounds when this message is  
displayed. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more  
information.  
This message displays when the passenger side front  
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is  
closed completely.  
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can  
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.  
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as  
soon as possible when this message is displayed.  
3-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY  
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY  
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise  
Control (ACC) system will not activate due to a  
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require  
service. If this message appears when you attempt to  
activate the system, continue driving for several minutes  
and then try activating the system again. See Adaptive  
Cruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.  
This message displays when the battery in the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.  
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under  
page 2-5.  
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN  
RAINSENSE WIPERS ACTIVE  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II wipers, this message  
displays while this feature is active. See Rainsense™  
II Wipers on page 3-14 for more information.  
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE  
This message displays while you are matching a  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.  
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under  
on page 2-5 and DIC Operation and Displays on  
page 3-68 for more information.  
This message displays when the passenger side rear  
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is  
closed completely.  
SERVICE AIR BAG  
This message displays when there is a problem with  
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness  
Light on page 3-54 for more information.  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-57 for more  
information. If this happens, stop as soon as possible and  
turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the  
message on the DIC display. If the message is displayed  
or appears again when you begin driving, the brake  
system needs service. See your dealer/retailer as soon  
as possible. See Brakes on page 5-33 for more  
information.  
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM  
This message displays when the air delivery mode door  
or the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning  
and heating systems are no longer working. Have the  
climate control system serviced by your dealer/retailer  
if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning  
efficiency.  
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING  
SYSTEM  
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM  
This message displays if the ignition is on to inform the  
driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake  
system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as  
possible.  
This message displays when a problem with the  
charging system has been detected. The charging  
system light also displays on the instrument panel  
cluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-56  
for more information. Have your vehicle serviced by  
your dealer/retailer.  
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM  
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)  
system, this message may display to indicate that the  
LDW system is not working properly. If this message  
remains on after continued driving, the system needs  
service. See your dealer/retailer. See Lane Departure  
Warning (LDW) on page 2-49 for more information.  
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST  
This message displays if there is a problem with the  
brake system. The brake system warning light and  
the antilock brake system warning light may also be  
displayed on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake  
3-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST  
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT  
SYSTEM  
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear  
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this message displays  
if there is a problem with the UFRPA system. Do not  
use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic Front  
more information. See your dealer/retailer for service.  
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)  
system and this message displays, both SBZA displays  
will remain on indicating there is a problem with the  
SBZA system. If these displays remain on after continued  
driving, the system needs service. See your dealer/  
retailer. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-45  
for more information.  
SERVICE POWER STEERING  
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering  
system. See Steering on page 4-8.  
SERVICE STABILITRAK  
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement  
system called StabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System  
on page 4-6.  
This message displays if a problem is detected with  
the speed variable assist steering system. When this  
message is displayed, you may notice that the effort  
required to steer the vehicle decreases or feels lighter,  
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.  
This message displays if there has been a problem  
detected with the StabiliTrak system.  
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE  
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull  
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.  
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off then  
back on. If this message still stays on or comes back on  
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.  
Have the StabiliTrak system inspected by your dealer/  
retailer as soon as possible.  
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise  
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision  
Alert (FCA) system are disabled and need service.  
See your dealer/retailer.  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)  
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL  
This message displays when the magnetic ride  
control or automatic leveling control system is not  
operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced by  
your dealer/retailer.  
This message displays when there is a problem with the  
Traction Control System (TCS). When this message is  
displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your  
driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service.  
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more  
information.  
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM  
This message displays when there is a problem with  
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault  
has been detected in the system which means that the  
system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.  
The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to  
take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off  
the engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer  
Operation on page 2-23 for more information.  
SERVICE TRANSMISSION  
This message displays when there is a problem with the  
vehicle’s transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by  
your dealer/retailer.  
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON  
This message displays when a non-emissions related  
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.  
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM  
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System  
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS  
is not working properly. The tire pressure light  
also flashes and then remains on during the same  
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-60.  
Several conditions may cause this message to appear.  
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-61 for  
more information. If the warning comes on and stays  
on, there may be a problem with the TPMS, see your  
dealer/retailer.  
SET SPD (Speed)  
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),  
this message displays whenever the cruise control is  
set. First, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”  
message appears. After a few seconds, the “CRUISE  
SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” message clears and the  
message “SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the  
DIC. See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” earlier in  
this section and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19  
for more information.  
3-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT  
SYSTEM OFF  
SPEED LIMIT XXX MPH (km/h)  
This message displays when the Speed Alert has been  
turned on through the DIC Information Menu and the  
vehicle is at or above the speed limit. See DIC Operation  
and Displays on page 3-68 for more information.  
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)  
system, this message displays when the SBZA system  
has been turned off. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on  
page 2-45 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-68  
for more information.  
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)  
This message displays when your vehicle speed  
is limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle  
detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering,  
magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling control  
systems. Have your vehicle serviced by your  
dealer/retailer.  
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM  
UNAVAILABLE  
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)  
system, this message displays when the SBZA system is  
disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot  
detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may be  
blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This message  
may also display during heavy rain or due to road spray.  
It may also come on when driving in isolated areas with  
no guardrails, trees, or road signs and light traffic. Your  
vehicle does not need service. For cleaning instructions,  
Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-45 for more information.  
STABILITRAK NOT READY  
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message may  
display and the Traction Control System and StabiliTrak  
Warning Light on the instrument panel cluster may  
be on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding  
19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak  
system is not functional until the light has turned off.  
See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more  
information.  
3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE  
THROTTLE  
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE  
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor  
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on  
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after  
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.  
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-65,  
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60, and  
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57 for more  
information.  
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle  
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle  
serviced by your dealer/retailer.  
THEFT ATTEMPTED  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
TRACTION CONTROL OFF  
This message displays when the Traction Control  
System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving  
on page 4-6 for more information.  
TRACTION CONTROL ON  
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent  
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were  
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent  
on page 2-21 for more information.  
This message displays when the Traction Control  
System (TCS) is turned on. See Traction Control  
System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.  
TIGHTEN GAS CAP  
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been  
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it  
is on and tightened properly.  
3-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE  
TURN SIGNAL ON  
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the  
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about  
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple chime  
sounds when this message is displayed.  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the  
transmission fluid is overheating and the  
transmission temperature warning is displayed  
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you  
can damage the transmission. This could lead  
to costly repairs that would not be covered by  
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with  
overheated transmission fluid or while the  
transmission temperature warning is displayed.  
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This message displays when the transmission fluid  
in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it  
to idle until the transmission cools down or until this  
message is removed.  
TRUNK OPEN  
This message displays when your vehicle is low on  
windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer  
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield  
Washer Fluid on page 5-32 for more information.  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This message displays when the trunk is not closed  
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed  
completely.  
3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering the Feature Settings Menu  
DIC Vehicle Customization  
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in  
P (Park).  
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow  
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.  
Customization features can only be programmed to  
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed  
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.  
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is  
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.  
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature  
settings menu.  
All of the customization options may not be available on  
your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed  
on the DIC.  
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS  
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering  
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).  
The default settings for the customization features were  
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have  
been changed from their default state since then.  
Feature Settings Menu Items  
The following are customization features that allow you  
to program settings to the vehicle:  
The customization preferences are automatically  
recalled.  
To change customization preferences, use the following  
procedure.  
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH  
This feature will only display if a language other than  
English has been set. This feature allows you to change  
the language in which the DIC messages appear to  
English.  
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO  
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC  
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all  
DIC messages in English.  
3-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DISPLAY LANGUAGE  
AUTO DOOR LOCK  
This feature allows you to select the language in which  
the DIC messages will appear.  
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s  
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable  
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for more  
information.  
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY  
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.  
Press the set/reset button once to access the settings  
for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button  
to scroll through the following settings:  
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button  
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press  
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following  
settings:  
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in  
English.  
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors  
automatically lock when the doors are closed and  
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).  
DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German.  
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.  
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.  
JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese.  
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.  
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors automatically lock  
when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)  
for three seconds.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK  
REMOTE DOOR LOCK  
This feature allows you to select whether or not to  
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also  
allows you to select which doors and when the doors  
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic  
Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information.  
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback  
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not  
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE  
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless  
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more  
information.  
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR  
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR  
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.  
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will  
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.  
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the  
lock button on the RKE transmitter.  
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock  
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).  
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you  
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.  
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press  
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.  
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when  
the key is taken out of the ignition.  
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps  
will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE  
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button  
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous  
command.  
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock  
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
3-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
DELAY DOOR LOCK  
This feature allows you to select whether or not  
the locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed.  
When locking the doors with the power door lock switch  
and a door is open, this feature will delay locking the  
doors until five seconds after the last door is closed.  
You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed  
locking feature is in use. The key must be out of the  
ignition for this feature to work. You can temporarily  
override delayed locking by pressing the power door  
lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE  
transmitter twice.  
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK  
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback  
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not  
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the  
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote  
for more information.  
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR  
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR  
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when  
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.  
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s  
doors.  
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will  
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE  
transmitter.  
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds  
after the last door is closed.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXIT LIGHTING  
APPROACH LIGHTING  
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you  
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark  
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned  
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.  
This feature allows you to select whether or not to  
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light  
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote  
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.  
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button  
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press  
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following  
settings:  
Press the customization button until APPROACH  
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button once to access the settings for this  
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to  
scroll through the following settings:  
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.  
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you  
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.  
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on  
for 30 seconds.  
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior  
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle  
with the RKE transmitter.  
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for  
one minute.  
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock  
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is  
Operation on page 2-5 for more information.  
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for  
two minutes.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHIME VOLUME  
PARK TILT MIRRORS  
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the  
chime.  
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically  
tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).  
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2-41 for more information.  
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button  
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press  
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following  
settings:  
Press the customization button until PARK TILT  
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button once to access the settings for this  
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal  
level.  
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down  
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).  
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be  
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).  
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will  
stay at the last known setting.  
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside  
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into  
R (Reverse).  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside  
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted  
into R (Reverse).  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
EASY EXIT RECALL  
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.  
page 1-6 for more information.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
EASY EXIT SETUP  
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT  
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat  
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic easy  
Wheel on page 1-6 and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier  
for more information.  
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall  
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing  
the easy exit seat button.  
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button  
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press  
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following  
settings:  
BUTTON AND KEY OUT (default): If the features are  
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the  
driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle has the  
power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature, the  
power steering column will move up and forward when  
the key is removed from the ignition or after pressing  
the easy exit seat button.  
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.  
SEAT ONLY: The driver’s seat will recall.  
TILT ONLY: The steering wheel tilt feature will recall.  
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur  
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.  
If the automatic movement has already occurred, and  
you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,  
the seat and steering column will stay in the original  
exit position, unless a memory recall took place prior to  
removing the key again.  
TELESCOPE ONLY: The steering column telescope  
feature will recall.  
3-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEAT/TILT: The driver’s seat and the steering wheel tilt  
feature will recall.  
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT  
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button once to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
SEAT/TELESCOPE: The driver’s seat and the steering  
column telescope feature will recall.  
TILT/TELESCOPE: The steering wheel tilt and steering  
column telescope features will recall.  
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will  
occur.  
ALL (default): The driver’s seat and the steering wheel  
tilt and steering column telescope features will recall,  
if your vehicle has this option.  
ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will  
automatically move to the stored driving position when  
the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
transmitter is pressed. The steering column will also  
move on vehicles with the power tilt and telescopic  
Steering Column on page 3-7 for more information.  
See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation  
and Displays on page 3-68 for more information on  
matching transmitters to driver ID numbers.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
MEMORY SEAT RECALL  
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
your preference for the remote memory seat recall  
Wheel on page 1-6 for more information.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
3-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE START  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the  
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows you  
to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote  
Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for more information.  
This feature allows you to set all of the customization  
features back to their factory default settings.  
Press the customization button until FACTORY  
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button once to access the settings for this  
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
Press the customization button until REMOTE START  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button  
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press  
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following  
settings:  
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features  
will be set to their factory default settings.  
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will  
not be set to their factory default settings.  
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this  
feature. The current setting will remain.  
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu  
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of  
the following occurs:  
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the  
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.  
The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).  
The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.  
The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are  
pressed.  
The end of the feature settings menu is reached  
and exited.  
A 40 second time period has elapsed with no  
selection made.  
3-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,  
do the following while the vehicle is parked:  
Audio System(s)  
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the  
following pages to become familiar with its features.  
Become familiar with the operation and controls of  
the audio system.  
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset  
radio stations.  
{ CAUTION:  
For more information, see Defensive Driving on  
page 4-2.  
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods  
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to  
you or others. Do not give extended attention to  
entertainment tasks while driving.  
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding  
any equipment.  
Adding audio or communication equipment could  
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,  
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.  
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and  
telephone equipment.  
This system provides access to many audio and non  
audio listings.  
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).  
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after  
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP) on page 2-26 for more information.  
3-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward  
arrow tab until the menu for default clock and  
date settings appear.  
Setting the Clock  
Radio with a Single CD or a  
Six-Disc CD Player  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently  
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON  
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled  
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock display  
is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio  
clock display on or off.  
The vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital  
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the digital  
radio clock display should be disabled. If you decide to  
use the digital radio clock as well as the analog clock, you  
can change the setting to enable the radio clock display.  
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen  
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then  
returns to the original clock display menu.  
Enabling/Disabling the Digital  
Radio Clock  
If the radio clock display is turned off, the  
screen displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds.  
The menus for clock and date settings are removed,  
and ON displays as a current status indicating that  
the clock display can be turned on, if desired.  
For the Single CD Player  
To turn the radio clock display on or off:  
1. Turn the radio on.  
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.  
Occasionally you might need to set the digital radio  
clock using the procedure below to synchronize  
both clocks.  
2. Press the H button until the clock and date setting  
menus appear.  
3-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For a Six-Disc CD Player  
To turn the radio clock display on or off:  
1. Turn the radio on.  
Setting the Time and Date  
For the Single CD Player  
This type of radio has a H button for setting the time  
and date. To set the time and date:  
2. Press the MENU button until H is displayed  
1. Turn the radio on.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under H until the  
2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY  
clock and date settings appear.  
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the forward  
arrow tab until the menu for default clock and  
date settings appear.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of  
the tabs that you want to change. Every time the  
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date  
if selected, increases by one.  
5. Press the pushbutton located under the currently  
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON  
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled  
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock display  
is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio  
clock display on or off.  
Another way to increase the time or date, is to  
press the right SEEK arrow or the \ FWD  
button.  
To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK  
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen  
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then  
returns to the original clock display menu.  
arrow or the s REV button. You can also turn  
the a knob, located on the upper right side of the  
radio faceplate, to adjust the selected setting.  
If the radio clock display is turned off, the  
screen displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds.  
The menus for clock and date settings are removed,  
and ON displays as a current status indicating that  
the clock display can be turned on, if desired.  
3-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For a Six-Disc CD Player  
Changing the Time and Date Default  
Setting  
This type of radio has a MENU button for setting the  
time and date. To set the time and date:  
For the Single CD Player  
1. Turn the radio on.  
To change the time and date default setting:  
2. Press the MENU button until H option is displayed.  
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/  
3. Press the pushbutton located under H and the  
HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,  
day, and year) displays.  
year to day/month/year, by pressing the H button.  
2. Once the clock and date settings display along with  
the forward arrow tab, press the pushbutton located  
under the forward arrow tab until the time 12H and  
24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and  
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)  
displays.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of  
the tabs that you want to change. Every time the  
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date  
if selected, increases by one.  
Another way to increase the time or date, is to  
press the right SEEK arrow or the \ FWD  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired  
option, then press the H button again to apply  
the selected default, or let the screen time out.  
button.  
To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK  
arrow or the s REV button. You can also turn  
the a knob, located on the upper right side of the  
radio faceplate, to adjust the selected setting.  
3-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the Six-Disc CD Player  
Radio(s) (MP3)  
To change the time and date default setting:  
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/  
year to day/month/year, by pressing the MENU  
button.  
2. Once H displays, press the pushbutton located  
under H until the time and date settings display  
along with a forward arrow.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward  
arrow tab until the time 12H and 24H, and the  
date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and  
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the desired  
option, then press the MENU button again to  
apply the selected default, or let the screen  
time out.  
Radio with CD shown, Radio with  
Six-Disc CD similar  
Radio Data System (RDS)  
The audio system has RDS. The RDS feature is  
available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS  
information. This system relies upon receiving specific  
information from these stations and only works when the  
information is available. While the radio is tuned to an  
FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.  
In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast incorrect  
information that causes the radio features to work  
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.  
3-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AudioPilot®: If the vehicle has the Bose® audio  
system, it has AudioPilot noise compensation technology.  
Playing the Radio  
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on  
and off.  
To use AudioPilot:  
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.  
Turn to increase or decrease the volume.  
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios  
with SCV automatically adjusts the radio volume to  
compensate for road and wind noise while driving.  
That way, the volume level should sound about  
the same while driving. To activate SCV:  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the  
AUTO VOLUM tab on the radio display.  
4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn this feature  
on or off.  
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.  
When turned ON, AudioPilot continuously adjusts  
the audio system equalization, to compensate for  
background noise, so that the music always sounds  
the same at the set volume level.  
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM  
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.  
The feature is most effective at lower radio volume  
settings where background noise can affect how well  
you hear the music being played through the vehicle’s  
audio system. At high volume settings there might  
be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For more  
information on AudioPilot, visit bose.com/audiopilot.  
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed  
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,  
or High) to select the level of radio volume  
compensation. The display times out after  
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting  
allows for more radio volume compensation at  
faster vehicle speeds.  
3-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding a Station  
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite  
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station  
favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to  
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,  
and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this  
feature. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™.  
The selection displays.  
a (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.  
©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the next or to  
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be  
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons  
positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and  
by using the radio favorites page button. Press the  
FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,  
each having six favorite stations available per page.  
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of  
AM, FM, or XM stations. To store a station as a favorite:  
the previous station and stay there.  
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for  
three seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes  
to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the  
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.  
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a  
strong signal that are in the selected band.  
1. Tune to the desired radio station.  
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,  
MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press this button to  
display additional text information related to the current  
FM-RDS or XM station, or MP3/WMA song. A choice of  
additional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist,  
CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing the  
information button to highlight the desired label, or press  
the pushbutton positioned under any one of the tabs and  
the information about that tab displays.  
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where  
you want the station stored.  
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a  
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed  
and released, the station that was set, returns.  
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station  
you want stored as a favorite.  
When information is not available, No Info displays.  
3-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the  
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:  
Setting the Tone  
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):  
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the a knob  
until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing  
to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton  
positioned under the desired label. Turn the a knob  
to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted  
setting can also be adjusted by pressing either  
SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until the  
desired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency  
is weak or has static, decrease the treble.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6  
label.  
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages  
by pressing the pushbutton located below the  
displayed page numbers.  
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,  
to return to the original main radio screen showing  
the radio station frequency labels and to begin  
the process of programming your favorites for  
the chosen amount of numbered pages.  
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle  
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the  
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.  
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle  
position.  
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the  
middle position, press the a knob for more than  
two seconds until a beep sounds.  
3-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose® amplified radio,  
perform the following steps to setup the equalization  
settings:  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,  
press the a knob until the speaker control labels display.  
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press  
the pushbutton positioned under the desired label.  
Turn the a knob to adjust the highlighted setting.  
The highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressing  
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV buttons  
until the desired levels are obtained.  
1. Press the a knob until the equalization label  
displays.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the equalization  
label to get choices of POP, ROCK, CTRY (country),  
TALK, JAZZ, and CLAS (classical), to display.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired  
setting.  
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,  
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE  
label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the  
level adjusts to the middle position.  
For the Bose amplified radio, perform the following  
steps to setup the equalization settings:  
1. Press the a knob until the DSP label displays.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label  
to get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, and Surround,  
to display.  
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the  
middle position, press the a knob for more than  
two seconds until a beep sounds.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired  
setting.  
To select Surround, press either the fourth or fifth  
pushbutton located under the displayed Surround  
until Centerpoint displays.  
To return to the manual mode, press the tune knob.  
Select either BASS, MID, or TREB and start to manually  
adjust the settings by turning the a knob.  
3-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DSP is only available on vehicles that have the Bose  
Premium audio system.  
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)  
This feature is used to provide a choice of four different  
listening experiences. DSP can be used while listening to  
the audio system or a CD. To change the DSP mode,  
Finding a Category (CAT) Station  
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM  
stations while the radio is in the XM mode. To find  
XM channels within a desired category, perform  
the following:  
press the a knob until the DSP control label displays.  
Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label until  
the control labels display. Continue by pressing the  
desired button below the control labels on the display.  
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency  
displays. Press the CAT button to display the  
category tabs. Continue pressing the CAT button  
until the desired category name displays. Another  
For more information on the control label displays,  
see the following:  
Norm (Normal): Select this screen button to adjust  
the audio for normal mode. This provides the best  
sound quality for all seating positions.  
Driv (Driver): Select this screen button to adjust  
the audio for the driver to receive the best  
possible sound quality.  
Rear: Select this screen button to adjust the audio  
for the rear seat passengers to receive the best  
possible sound quality.  
Surround (Centerpoint®): Select this screen button  
to enable Bose® Centerpoint signal processing  
circuitry. Centerpoint produces a full vehicle surround  
sound listening experience from a CD, MP3/WMA,  
or XM stereo digital audio source and delivers five  
independent audio channels from conventional two  
channel stereo recordings. (Not available for AM,  
FM, or auxiliary sources.)  
way to select a category is to press the s REV  
or \ FWD button until the desired category is  
selected.  
2. Press either of the two pushbuttons below the  
desired category tab to immediately tune to the  
first XM station associated with that category.  
3. Turn the a knob, press the pushbuttons below the  
displayed right or left arrows, or press either SEEK  
arrow to go to the previous or the next XM station  
within the selected category.  
4. To exit the category search mode, press the  
FAV button or BAND button to display your  
favorites again.  
3-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the  
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:  
Radio Message  
Locked: This message displays when the  
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.  
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the  
XM CAT tab.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be  
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.  
3. Turn the a knob to display the category to be  
removed.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove  
tab until the category name along with the word  
Removed displays.  
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the  
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.  
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming  
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in  
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you  
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio  
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service  
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more  
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call  
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or  
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.  
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.  
Removed categories can be restored by pressing  
the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed  
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton  
under the Restore All label.  
The radio does not let you remove or add categories  
while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).  
The CAT button also toggles between compressed  
and uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present.  
See “Compressed Audio” later in this section.  
Radio Messages for XM™ Only  
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-115 later in this  
section for further detail.  
3-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free  
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral  
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.  
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center  
to the edge.  
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.  
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the  
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio  
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,  
if it was the last selected audio source.  
Care of The CD Player  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the  
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer  
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top  
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.  
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.  
As each new track starts to play the track number  
displays.  
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,  
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics  
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.  
Care of CDs  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due  
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of  
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R  
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)  
in their original cases or other protective cases and away  
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the  
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is  
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the  
CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the  
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage  
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or  
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.  
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than  
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an  
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,  
the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD  
player, use only CDs in good condition without any  
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player  
and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,  
and debris.  
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this  
section.  
3-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)  
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of  
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.  
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either  
arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player  
continues moving backward or forward through the CD.  
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.  
The CD player holds up to six CDs.  
To insert one CD:  
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse  
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound  
at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing  
the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.  
1. Press and release the load button.  
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.  
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,  
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance  
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound  
at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing  
the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.  
To insert multiple CDs:  
1. Press and hold the LOAD button for five seconds.  
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.  
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert  
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.  
RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD tracks  
can be played in random, rather than sequential  
order. This feature is not available in playlist mode.  
To use random, do the following:  
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading  
more CDs.  
1. To play tracks in random order from the CD that is  
currently playing, press the pushbutton positioned  
under the RDM label. The random icon displays.  
Z (Eject): Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not  
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically  
pulls back into the player.  
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random  
play. The random icon is no longer highlighted.  
For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, press and hold  
for two seconds to eject all discs, if one or more  
discs are loaded.  
a (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently  
playing.  
3-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):  
With the random setting, CD tracks can be played  
in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD  
or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use random:  
Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab  
until Randomize Current Disc displays to play the  
tracks in random order from the CD that is currently  
playing. Press again to turn off random play.  
Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab  
until Randomize All Discs displays to play tracks  
from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player in  
random order. Press again to turn off random play.  
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or  
CD-RW Disc  
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an  
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information  
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc,  
see Using an MP3 on page 3-110 later in this section.  
CD Messages  
DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the CD  
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:  
The radio system does not support the playlist  
format, the compressed audio format, or the data  
file format.  
4 (Information): Press to switch the display between  
the track number, elapsed time of the track, and the  
time. When the ignition is off, press to display the time  
(if the clock display is enabled). See “Enabling/Disabling  
the Digital Radio Clock” under, Setting the Clock on  
page 3-96 for more information.  
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to  
normal, the CD should play.  
You are driving on a very rough road. When the  
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.  
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is  
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future  
listening.  
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and  
try again.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when  
listening to the radio. The CD icon and track number  
displays when a CD is in the player. Press again and  
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input  
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable  
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device  
Found” displays.  
There could have been a problem while burning  
the CD.  
The label could be caught in the CD player.  
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,  
try a known good CD.  
3-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot  
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio  
displays an error message, write it down and provide  
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.  
automatically detects the device and “Aux Input Device”  
displays. The device begins playing audio over the  
vehicle speakers. If an auxiliary device has already been  
connected, the device does not begin playing audio until  
the radio’s CD/AUX button is pressed.  
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack  
O (Power/Volume): Turn to increase or decrease the  
volume of the portable player. You might need to do  
additional volume adjustments from the portable device.  
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located  
on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an  
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the  
front auxiliary input jack. You can however, connect  
an external audio device such as an iPod™, laptop  
computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape  
player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another  
source for audio listening.  
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable  
audio device is playing. The portable audio device  
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or  
power it off.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a  
portable audio device is playing. Press again and  
the system begins playing audio from the connected  
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is  
not connected, “No Aux Input Device Found” displays.  
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device  
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on  
page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.  
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm  
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.  
When connecting an auxiliary device, the radio  
3-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MP3/WMA Format  
Using an MP3  
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal  
computer:  
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc  
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded  
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with  
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,  
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,  
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps  
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album  
can display when files are recorded using ID3 tags  
version 1 and 2.  
Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a  
CD-R or CD-RW disc.  
Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on  
one disc.  
The CD player is able to read and play a maximum  
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.  
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find  
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums  
using one folder for each album. Each folder  
or album should contain 18 songs or less.  
Compressed Audio  
The radio also plays discs that contain both  
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA  
files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed  
audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing the  
CAT button toggles between compressed and  
uncompressed audio format.  
Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to  
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number  
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the  
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a  
particular folder during playback.  
Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension  
(other file extensions might not work).  
3-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist  
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a  
combination of a large number of files and folders,  
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play  
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,  
or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of  
files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the  
length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long  
names also take up more space on the display,  
potentially getting cut off.  
Root Directory  
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as  
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,  
the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained  
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any  
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always  
accessed before root folders or files.  
Empty Directory or Folder  
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in  
the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders  
and no compressed files directly beneath them, the  
player advances to the next folder in the file structure  
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder  
does not display.  
Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to  
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not  
to function in the player.  
Playlists can be changed by using the S c and  
c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.  
An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded  
using no file folders can also be played. If a CD-R or  
CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,  
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access  
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over  
the maximum cannot be accessed.  
No Folder  
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files  
are located under the root folder. The next and previous  
folder functions do not display on a CD that was recorded  
without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of  
the folder the radio displays ROOT.  
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed  
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the  
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons  
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root  
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder  
the radio displays ROOT.  
3-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Order of Play  
File System and Naming  
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the  
following order:  
The song name that displays is the song name that is  
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present  
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name  
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.  
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist  
and continues sequentially through all tracks in  
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist  
has played, play continues from the first track of  
the first playlist.  
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages  
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of  
text and the extension of the filename does not display.  
− Playlists can be changed by pressing  
the S c and c T folder buttons,  
the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.  
Preprogrammed Playlists  
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using  
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software  
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited  
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special  
folders containing compressed audio song files. Playlists  
must have a file extension of PLS, M3U, or WPL.  
Play begins from the first track in the first folder and  
continues sequentially through all tracks in each  
folder. When the last track of the last folder has  
played, play continues from the first track of the  
first folder.  
Playlists can be changed by using the S c and  
When play enters a new folder, the display does  
not automatically show the new folder name unless  
the folder mode has been chosen as the default display.  
The new track name displays.  
c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.  
Tracks cannot be changed. Songs are played  
sequentially; press the s REV or \ FWD to reverse  
or advance through the currently playing song.  
3-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing an MP3/WMA  
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to  
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than ten  
seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go  
to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held  
or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving  
backward or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.  
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single  
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for the  
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side  
up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should  
begin playing.  
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton  
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track  
in the previous folder.  
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or  
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently  
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds  
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,  
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be  
removed. If it is not removed, after several seconds,  
the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the  
player and begins playing.  
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned  
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the next  
folder.  
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse  
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard  
at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume  
playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.  
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button for  
two seconds to eject all discs.  
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance  
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard  
at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume  
playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.  
the CD-R currently playing.  
3-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA  
files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather  
than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all  
discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random:  
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to  
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current  
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display  
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist have  
played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical  
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing  
MP3/WMA files by that artist. If you want to listen to  
MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the pushbutton  
located below either arrow button. The CD goes to the  
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue  
pressing either button until the desired artist displays.  
1. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM  
label until Random Current Disc displays to play  
MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random  
order. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off  
random play.  
2. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM  
label until Randomize All Discs displays to play  
songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player  
in random order. Press the same pushbutton  
again to turn off random play.  
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,  
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.  
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the  
album button. Press the pushbutton below the Back label  
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the  
album name displays on the second line between the  
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.  
Once all songs from that album have played, the player  
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the  
CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files  
from that album.  
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator  
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW  
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located  
below the music navigator label. The player scans  
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag  
information. It may take several minutes to scan the disc  
depending on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to  
the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might begin playing while  
it is scanning the disc in the background. When the scan  
is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.  
To exit music navigator mode, press the button below the  
Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback.  
3-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is  
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for  
future listening.  
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and  
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.  
This message should disappear shortly.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when  
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message  
showing disc and/or track number displays when a  
CD is in the player. Press this button again and  
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary  
input device such as a portable audio player. If a  
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux  
Input Device Found” displays.  
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in  
service. Tune in to another channel.  
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be  
received with your XM Subscription package.  
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is  
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station  
was one of the presets, choose another station for that  
preset button.  
XM Radio Messages  
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this  
time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,  
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,  
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).  
No Title Info: No song title information is available  
at this time on this channel. The system is working  
properly.  
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is  
being updated, and no action is required. This process  
should take no longer than 30 seconds.  
No CAT Info: No category information is available at  
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.  
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,  
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™  
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,  
the signal should return.  
No Information: No text or informational messages are  
available at this time on this channel. The system is  
working properly.  
3-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bluetooth®  
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for  
the selected category. The system is working properly.  
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth  
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make  
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while  
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.  
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft.  
(9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions, and not  
all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more  
information on compatible phones.  
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could  
have previously been in another vehicle. For security  
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between  
vehicles. If this message is received after having the  
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.  
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message  
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.  
This label is needed to activate the service.  
Voice Recognition  
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to  
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult  
with your dealer/retailer.  
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret  
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.  
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear  
within a short period of time, the receiver could have  
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.  
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.  
The system may not recognize voice commands if  
there is too much background noise.  
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear  
within a short period of time, the receiver could have  
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.  
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system  
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice  
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.  
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural  
voice.  
Navigation/Radio System  
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the  
separate Navigation System manual.  
3-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Audio System  
Pairing  
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound  
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers  
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system  
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.  
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later  
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level  
is used if the volume is turned down too low.  
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to  
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected  
to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions  
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not  
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free  
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for  
more information.  
Bluetooth Controls  
Pairing Information:  
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to  
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio  
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-127 for more  
information.  
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system.  
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is  
moving.  
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,  
to confirm system information, and to start speech  
recognition.  
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links  
with the first available paired cell phone in the  
order the phone was paired.  
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a  
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the  
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.  
call, or to cancel an operation.  
Pairing should only need to be completed once,  
unless changes to the pairing information have  
been made or the phone is deleted.  
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a  
Different Phone later in this section.  
3-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pairing a Phone  
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions  
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will  
be used in Step 4.  
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth  
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the  
system will say “Is connected” after the connected  
phone.  
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will  
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide for information on  
this process.  
Deleting a Paired Phone  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the  
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions  
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number  
that was provided in Step 3.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to  
delete followed by a tone.  
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone.  
Use a name that best describes the phone.  
This name will be used to indicate which phone  
is connected. The system then confirms the name  
provided.  
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the  
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command  
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds  
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?  
Yes or No” followed by a tone.  
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has  
been successfully paired” after the pairing process  
is complete.  
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system  
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.  
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to  
be paired.  
3-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Linking to a Different Phone  
Using the Store Command  
The store command allows a phone number to be  
stored without entering the digits individually.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with  
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.  
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,  
number please” followed by a tone.  
If another phone is found, the response will be  
“<Phone name> is now connected”.  
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at  
once with no pauses.  
If the system recognizes the number it responds  
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.  
If another phone is not found, the original phone  
remains connected.  
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone  
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the  
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the  
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not  
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the  
number to be re-entered.  
Storing Name Tags  
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as  
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and  
OnStar systems.  
The system uses the following commands to store and  
retrieve phone numbers:  
Store  
Digit Store  
Directory  
3-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. After the system stores the phone number, it  
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed  
by a tone.  
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will  
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.  
Continue entering digits until the number to be  
stored is complete.  
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name  
tag is recorded and the system responds with  
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.  
If an unwanted number is recognized by the  
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the  
last number.  
If the name tag does not sound correct, say  
“No” and repeat Step 5.  
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the  
system, say “Verify” at any time and the  
system will repeat them.  
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and  
the name tag is stored. After the number is  
stored the system returns to the main menu.  
4. After the complete number has been entered, say  
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the  
name tag” followed by a tone.  
Using the Digit Store Command  
The digit store command allows a phone number to be  
stored by entering the digits individually.  
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name  
tag is recorded and the system responds with  
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
If the name tag does not sound correct, say  
“No” and repeat Step 5.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with  
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by  
a tone.  
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and  
the name tag is stored. After the number is  
stored the system returns to the main menu.  
3-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system  
responds with “Would you like to delete,  
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.  
Using the Directory Command  
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored  
by the system. To use the directory command:  
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete  
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,  
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with  
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored  
name tags. When the list is complete, the system  
returns to the main menu.  
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system  
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say  
the name tag.”  
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command  
Deleting Name Tags  
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored  
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar  
(if present).  
The system uses the following commands to delete  
name tags:  
Delete  
To use the delete all name tags command:  
Delete all name tags  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Using the Delete Command  
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds  
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored  
in your phone directory and your route destination  
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please  
say yes or no.”  
The delete command allows specific name tags to be  
deleted.  
To use the delete command:  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the  
main menu.  
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,  
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.  
3-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Digit Dial Command  
Making a Call  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
Calls can be made using the following commands:  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
Dial  
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with  
“Digit dial using <phone name>, please say the  
first digit to dial” followed by a tone.  
Digit Dial  
Call  
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following  
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it  
heard followed by a tone.  
Re-dial  
Using the Dial Command  
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be  
dialed is complete. After the whole number has  
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds  
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using  
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.  
If an unwanted number is recognized by the  
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the  
last number.  
3. Say the entire number without pausing.  
If the system recognizes the number, it responds  
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.  
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the  
system, say “Verify” at any time and the  
system will repeat them.  
If the system does not recognize the number,  
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.  
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system  
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the  
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.  
The system will ask for the number to be  
re-entered.  
Using the Call Command  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using  
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed  
by a tone.  
3-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.  
Receiving a Call  
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it  
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and  
dials the number.  
When an incoming call is received, the audio system  
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.  
Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.  
Press c x to ignore a call.  
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right  
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by  
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The  
system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”  
and dials the number. If the name tag is not  
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the  
name tag to be re-entered.  
Call Waiting  
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone  
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.  
Press b g to answer an incoming call when  
another call is active. The original call is placed  
on hold.  
Once connected, the person called will be heard  
through the audio speakers.  
Using the Re-dial Command  
Press b g again to return to the original call.  
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the  
original call with no action.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds  
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the  
last number called from the connected Bluetooth  
phone.  
Press c x to disconnect the current call and  
switch to the call on hold.  
Once connected, the person called will be heard  
through the audio speakers.  
3-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Mute a call  
Three-Way Calling  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the  
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service  
carrier to work.  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with  
“Call muted”.  
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds  
with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
To Cancel Mute  
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with  
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of  
the third party to be called.  
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system  
responds with “Resuming call”.  
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all  
Transferring a Call  
the callers together.  
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.  
Ending a Call  
Press c x to end a call.  
Muting a Call  
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone  
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:  
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can  
be muted so that the person on the other end of the  
call cannot hear them.  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with  
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from  
the vehicle to the cell phone.  
3-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle  
Bluetooth System  
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)  
Tones  
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with  
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.  
The connection process can take up to two minutes after  
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY  
position.  
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and  
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used  
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account  
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for  
retrieval during menu driven calls.  
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,  
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio  
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.  
Sending a Number During a Call  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
Voice Pass-Thru  
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a  
number to send tones” followed by a tone.  
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition  
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone  
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone  
supports this feature. This feature can be used to  
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.  
3. Say the number to send.  
If the system clearly recognizes the number it  
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the  
dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system  
If the system is not sure it recognized the  
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,  
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.  
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system  
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and  
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with  
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.  
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with  
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.  
The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will  
go through its cycle according to the phone’s  
operating instructions.  
3-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call  
Other Information  
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the  
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by  
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks  
and trade names are those of their respective owners.  
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”  
followed by a tone.  
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with  
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
3. Say the name tag to send.  
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it  
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and  
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
If the system is not sure it recognized the  
name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,  
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.  
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system  
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and  
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Clearing the System  
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle  
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.  
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook  
and phone pairing information. For information on  
how to delete this information, see the above sections  
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
3-126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle  
Theft-Deterrent Feature  
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.  
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the  
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate  
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.  
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press  
and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with  
those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-51  
and Bluetooth® on page 3-116 in this manual for more  
information.  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio  
(AM, FM, XM), CD, and for vehicles with, DVD,  
front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.  
Vehicles with audio  
steering wheel controls  
could differ depending  
on the vehicle’s options.  
Some audio controls can  
be adjusted at the steering  
wheel.  
For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold  
this button for longer than two seconds to initiate voice  
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation  
System manual for more information.  
+ e e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease  
the radio volume.  
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while  
in AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨to go to the next track or  
chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press  
the ¨if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc  
while sourced to a CD player.  
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored  
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.  
c x(Previous/End): Press to go to the previous  
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if a  
CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or end  
a current call.  
3-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
Radio Reception  
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception  
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,  
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can  
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to  
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under  
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause  
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.  
Frequency interference and static can occur during  
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone  
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external  
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power  
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item  
from the accessory power outlet.  
AM  
Cellular Phone Usage  
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,  
especially at night. The longer range can cause station  
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio  
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels  
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the  
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and  
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this  
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.  
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the  
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making  
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,  
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes  
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.  
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug  
the cellular phone and turn it off.  
FM Stereo  
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles  
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in  
electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce  
interference, some static can occur, especially around  
tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in  
and out.  
3-128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting  
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting  
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming  
radio reception. Any damage caused to your  
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials  
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Backglass Antenna  
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear  
window defogger, located in the rear window. Make  
sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not  
scratched and that the lines on the glass are not  
damaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it could  
interfere with radio reception. For proper radio reception,  
the antenna connector needs to be properly attached  
to the post on the glass.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna  
System  
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to  
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM  
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space  
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone  
antenna without interfering with radio reception.  
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of  
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for  
clear radio reception.  
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM  
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.  
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear  
the inside rear window can damage the rear window  
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs  
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not  
clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.  
3-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
3-130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4  
Driving Your Vehicle  
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Defensive Driving  
Your Driving, the Road, and  
the Vehicle  
Defensive driving means “always expect the  
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to  
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for  
Everyone on page 1-12.  
Driving for Better Fuel Economy  
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some  
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.  
{ CAUTION:  
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.  
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.  
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.  
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,  
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be  
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they  
might do and be ready. In addition:  
Allow enough following distance between you  
and the driver in front of you.  
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,  
use cruise control, if equipped.  
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more  
slowly when conditions require.  
Focus on the task of driving.  
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.  
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in  
injury or possible death. These simple defensive  
driving techniques could save your life.  
Combine several trips into a single trip.  
Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec  
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.  
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every  
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,  
psychological, and developmental reasons for  
these laws.  
Drunk Driving  
{ CAUTION:  
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway  
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and  
then drive.  
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your  
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment  
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.  
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision  
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or  
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home  
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a  
driver who will not drink.  
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s  
system can make crash injuries worse, especially  
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means  
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver  
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of  
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the  
person had not been drinking.  
Control of a Vehicle  
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  
a global tragedy.  
The following three systems help to control the vehicle  
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.  
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask  
more of those control systems than the tires and road can  
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.  
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a  
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and  
attentiveness.  
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor  
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,  
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking  
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual  
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with  
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications  
on page 5-3.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and  
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of  
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and  
longer brake life.  
Braking  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-56.  
Braking action involves perception time and reaction  
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception  
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.  
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,  
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes  
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.  
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake  
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once  
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and  
the brake pedal will be harder to push.  
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a  
second. But that is only an average. It might be less  
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or  
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,  
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,  
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a  
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels  
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an  
emergency, so keeping enough space between  
the vehicle and others is important.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications  
on page 5-3.  
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly  
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement  
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is  
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;  
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force  
applied.  
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an  
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a  
braking skid.  
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to  
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor  
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going  
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal  
moves a little. This is normal.  
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive  
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy  
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a  
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between  
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If there is a problem with  
ABS, this warning light  
stays on. See Antilock  
Using ABS  
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal  
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or  
motor operating might be heard and the brake pedal  
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.  
page 3-57.  
Braking in Emergencies  
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.  
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam  
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what  
happens with ABS:  
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same  
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than  
even the very best braking.  
Brake Assist  
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.  
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer  
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel  
and at both rear wheels.  
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to  
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed  
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the  
stability system hydraulic brake control module to  
supplement the power brake system under conditions  
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied  
the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow  
down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic  
brake control module increases brake pressure at each  
corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor  
brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this  
time is normal and the driver should continue to  
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates  
The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage  
when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal  
pressure is quickly decreased.  
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as  
required, faster than any driver could. This can help  
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.  
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving  
updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure  
accordingly.  
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get  
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping  
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,  
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that  
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough  
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
StabiliTrak® System  
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument  
panel cluster will flash when the system is operating.  
on page 3-58 and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on  
page 3-58 for more information. The system may be  
heard or felt while it is working. This is normal.  
The vehicle may have the StabiliTrak system which  
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control  
systems and helps the driver maintain directional control  
of the vehicle in most driving conditions. This is  
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the  
vehicle’s brakes and reducing engine power.  
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message is displayed and  
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument panel  
cluster comes on if there is a problem with the system.  
When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAK  
message are on, the system is not working. Adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
The StabiliTrak system comes on automatically  
whenever the vehicle is started. The system cannot be  
turned off.  
This light will flash when  
the system is operating.  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that  
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery  
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses  
that the front wheels are spinning too much or beginning  
to lose traction. When this happens, the system works  
the front brakes and reduces engine power (by closing  
the throttle and managing engine spark) to limit  
wheel spin.  
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be  
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the  
Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning  
light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after first  
driving the vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)  
for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is off until the  
light has turned off. This could take up to 15 minutes.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The TCS and StabiliTrak®  
light will flash when the  
system is limiting  
To turn the system off or  
on, press and release this  
button located in front  
of the shift lever.  
wheel spin.  
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but  
Warning Light on page 3-58 for more information.  
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is  
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery  
road conditions, always leave the system turned on.  
TCS can be turned off if needed.  
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to  
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically  
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when  
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-16.  
The system can be turned on or off at any time by  
pressing the TCS button. The DIC will display  
TRACTION CONTROL OFF when the button is pressed,  
and part of the traction control system is disabled.  
The vehicle will still have brake-traction control, but will  
not be able to use the engine speed management  
system. System noises may be heard as a result of the  
brake-traction control working. If the controller detects  
excessive wheel spin in this mode, the TCS/StabiliTrak  
light may blink.  
The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message in  
the DIC and the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes on  
if there is a problem with the traction control system.  
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73.  
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION  
CONTROL message are on, the system will not limit  
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal  
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn  
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or  
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to  
Snow on page 4-18.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect  
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.  
Steering  
Power Steering  
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops  
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be  
steered but it will take more effort.  
Magnetic Ride Control™  
The vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that  
automatically adjusts the ride of the vehicle.  
The controller receives input from the system to  
determine the proper ride. If the controller detects a  
problem within the system, the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) displays a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS  
message. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-73 for more information. If this message appears,  
have the vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer.  
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist  
Steering System  
This system continuously adjusts the effort felt when  
steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease  
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.  
Steering Tips  
Electronically Controlled Air Ride  
Suspension  
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.  
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires  
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is  
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is  
the one factor that can be controlled.  
Professional Vehicles may have Electronically Controlled  
Air Suspension. The air ride controller receives input  
from the system to determine the proper ride. If the  
controller detects a problem with the system, the DIC  
will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message.  
If this message appears, have the vehicle serviced  
at your dealer/retailer.  
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering  
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.  
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the  
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to  
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate  
gently into the straightaway.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Steering in Emergencies  
There are times when steering can be more effective  
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find  
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls  
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between  
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These  
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop  
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time  
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive  
action — steering around the problem.  
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like  
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.  
It is better to remove as much speed as possible  
from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the  
left or right depending on the space available.  
An emergency like this requires close attention and a  
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the  
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned  
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing  
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and  
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have  
avoided the object.  
The fact that such emergency situations are always  
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving  
at all times and wear safety belts properly.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Off-Road Recovery  
Passing  
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a  
road onto the shoulder while driving.  
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be  
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:  
Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads  
for situations that might affect a successful pass.  
If in doubt, wait.  
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and  
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.  
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side  
of the lane.  
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to  
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.  
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.  
When you are being passed, ease to the right.  
Loss of Control  
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the  
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,  
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the  
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,  
8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front  
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering  
wheel to go straight down the roadway.  
Let us review what driving experts say about what  
happens when the three control systems — brakes,  
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction  
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has  
asked.  
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer  
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less  
danger.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, the system may be  
Skidding  
active. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.  
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.  
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving  
those conditions. But skids are always possible.  
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,  
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow  
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is  
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because  
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more  
limited.  
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s  
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels  
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too  
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip  
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration  
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels  
to spin.  
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your  
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,  
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower  
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to  
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until  
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning  
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on  
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down  
when you have any doubt.  
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only  
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is  
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing  
your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want  
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,  
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for  
a second skid if it occurs.  
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps  
avoid only the braking skid.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.  
Driving at Night  
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle  
clean — inside and out.  
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving  
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by  
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by  
fatigue.  
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or  
curves.  
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But, as  
we get older, these differences increase. A 50-year-old  
driver might need at least twice as much light to see the  
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.  
Night driving tips include:  
Drive defensively.  
Do not drink and drive.  
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside  
rearview mirror.  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
Slow down and keep more space between you and  
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up  
so much road ahead.  
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction  
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate.  
Always drive slower in these types of driving  
conditions and avoid driving through large puddles  
and deep-standing or flowing water.  
Watch for animals.  
When tired, pull off the road.  
Do not wear sunglasses.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hydroplaning  
{ CAUTION:  
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under  
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the  
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and  
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is  
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.  
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not  
work as well in a quick stop and could cause  
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the  
vehicle.  
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.  
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.  
After driving through a large puddle of water or a  
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until  
the brakes work normally.  
Other Rainy Weather Tips  
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips  
include:  
Allow extra following distance.  
Pass with caution.  
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.  
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.  
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.  
Driving through flowing water could cause your  
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you  
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not  
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about  
trying to drive through flowing water.  
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires  
on page 5-48.  
Turn off cruise control.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Highway Hypnosis  
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having  
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.  
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings  
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a  
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.  
Things to check on your own include:  
Other driving tips include:  
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows  
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.  
Keep interior temperature cool.  
clean — inside and outside?  
Wiper Blades: In good shape?  
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?  
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?  
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead  
and to the sides.  
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments  
often.  
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to  
recommended pressure?  
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?  
Have up-to-date maps?  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hill and Mountain Roads  
{ CAUTION:  
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different  
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving  
in these conditions include:  
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition  
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the  
work of slowing down and they could get so hot  
that they would not work well. You would then  
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.  
You could crash. Always have the engine running  
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.  
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.  
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling  
system, and transmission.  
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a  
lower gear.  
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut  
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds  
that let you stay in your own lane.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so  
hot that they would not work well. You would then  
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.  
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine  
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.  
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your  
lane (stalled car, accident).  
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks  
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or  
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4 improves  
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,  
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry  
pavement.  
Winter Driving  
Driving on Snow or Ice  
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the  
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice  
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain  
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid  
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be  
treated with salt or sand.  
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road  
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on  
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface  
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when  
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering  
maneuvers and braking while on ice.  
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate  
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly  
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under  
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.  
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.  
Blizzard Conditions  
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay  
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,  
use the Roadside Service on page 7-7. To get help and  
keep everyone in the vehicle safe:  
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too  
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface  
under the tires even more.  
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads,  
but slow down and adjust your driving to the road  
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off  
the traction control system to help maintain vehicle  
motion at lower speeds.  
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{ CAUTION:  
For more information about carbon monoxide, see  
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.  
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.  
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.  
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)  
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause  
unconsciousness and even death.  
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.  
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas  
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.  
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know  
it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around  
the base of your vehicle, especially any that is  
blocking the exhaust.  
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:  
Clear away snow from around the base of  
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking  
the exhaust pipe.  
Check again from time to time to be sure  
snow does not collect there.  
Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on  
the side of the vehicle that is away from the  
wind to bring in fresh air.  
Fully open the air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel.  
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting  
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and  
set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
See Climate Control System in the Index.  
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep  
warm, but be careful.  
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as  
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off  
and close the window most of the way to save heat.  
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really  
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm  
also helps.  
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when  
you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so  
the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the  
battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for  
help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to  
save fuel.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,  
Mud, Ice, or Snow  
{ CAUTION:  
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the  
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See  
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,  
they can explode, and you or others could be  
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an  
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin  
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going  
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the  
speedometer.  
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to  
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction  
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction  
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off  
and use the rocking method.  
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,  
see Tire Chains on page 5-73.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out  
Loading the Vehicle  
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the  
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or  
stability system. Shift back and forth between  
It is very important to know how much weight your  
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle  
capacity weight and includes the weight of all  
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed  
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much  
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading  
Information label and the Certification label.  
R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as  
little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait  
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.  
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press  
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission  
is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and  
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could  
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after  
a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the  
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Your  
Vehicle on page 4-26.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or  
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the  
vehicle can break, and it can change the way  
your vehicle handles. These could cause you  
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading  
can shorten the life of the vehicle.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows  
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and  
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).  
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires  
on page 5-48 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-57.  
Tire and Loading Information Label  
There is also important loading information on the  
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see  
“Certification Label” later in this section.  
If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire and  
Loading Information label specific to your vehicle  
will be provided and installed by the final body  
manufacturer. The Tire and Loading Information  
label, should be attached to the B-pillar of  
your vehicle. See the final stage manufacturer’s  
manual or contact them directly. The label  
shows the original tires installed on your  
professional vehicle and the recommended cold  
tire inflation pressures for those tires. The label  
also tells you the professional vehicle’s capacity  
weight.  
Label Example  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information  
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar  
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find  
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).  
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the  
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the  
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms  
and pounds.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That  
weight may not safely exceed the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in  
Step 4.  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers that will be riding in your  
vehicle.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load  
from your trailer will be transferred to your  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity of your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing a  
Trailer” for important information on towing  
a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity is  
650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 1  
Description  
Example 2  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Item  
Total  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for  
Example 1 =  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for  
Example 2 =  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
A
A
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 150 lbs  
(68 kg) × 2 =  
Available Occupant  
and Cargo Weight =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 150 lbs  
(68 kg) × 5 =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)  
700 lbs (317 kg)  
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)  
250 lbs (113 kg)  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Certification Label  
Example 3  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Vehicle Capacity  
Weight for  
Example 3 =  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
A
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to  
the rear edge of the driver’s door. This label  
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,  
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).  
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,  
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the  
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front  
or rear axle.  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 200 lbs  
(91 kg) × 5 =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
1,000 lbs  
(453 kg)  
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)  
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading  
Information label for specific information about  
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating  
positions. The combined weight of the driver,  
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your  
vehicle’s capacity weight.  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the vehicle  
specific Certification label is provided by the final  
stage manufacturer. The coach-builder should be  
consulted if the final stage manufacturer’s label is  
not present. The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating  
GVWR label should be on the driver’s door edge.  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or  
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the  
vehicle can break, and it can change the way  
your vehicle handles. These could cause you  
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading  
can shorten the life of the vehicle.  
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it  
out. See “Steps for Determining Correct Load  
Limit” earlier in this section.  
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause  
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,  
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go  
as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or  
turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep  
going.  
Automatic Level Control  
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level  
as the load changes. It is automatic, you do  
not need to adjust anything.  
This type of level control is fully automatic and will  
provide a better leveled riding position as well  
as better handling under a variety of passenger  
and loading conditions. An air compressor  
connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower  
the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle  
height. The system is activated when the  
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN and will  
automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.  
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height)  
for up to ten minutes after the ignition key  
has been turned to LOCK/OFF. You may hear the  
air compressor operating when the height is  
being adjusted.  
{ CAUTION:  
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike  
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or  
in a crash.  
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.  
In a trunk, put them as far forward as you  
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.  
Never stack heavier things, like  
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some  
of them are above the tops of the seats.  
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint  
in your vehicle.  
When you carry something inside the  
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Here are some important things to consider before  
recreational vehicle towing:  
Towing  
What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?  
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s  
recommendations.  
Towing Your Vehicle  
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing  
service if the disabled vehicle must be towed.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.  
How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles  
have restrictions on how far and how long they  
can tow.  
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for  
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),  
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.  
Does the vehicle have the proper towing  
equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering  
professional for additional advice and equipment  
recommendations.  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing  
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is  
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a  
Long Trip on page 4-14.  
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle  
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.  
The two most common types of recreational vehicle  
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.  
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels  
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle  
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a  
device known as a dolly.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dinghy Towing  
Dolly Towing  
The vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow the  
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:  
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.  
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).  
3. Set the parking brake.  
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels  
on the ground, the drivetrain components could  
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by  
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all  
four wheels on the ground.  
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all  
four wheels on the ground. Use a dolly if the vehicle  
must be towed. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section  
for more information.  
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead  
position with a clamping device designed for towing.  
5. Remove the key from the ignition.  
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.  
7. Release the parking brake.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the  
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering  
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight  
of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering  
is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.  
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,  
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe  
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used  
properly.  
Towing a Trailer  
The Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a trailer.  
{ CAUTION:  
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if  
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is  
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is  
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or  
even at all. The driver and passengers could be  
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be  
The following information has many time-tested,  
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these  
are important for the safety of the driver and the  
passengers. So please read this section carefully before  
pulling a trailer.  
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only  
if all the steps in this section have been followed.  
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information  
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.  
Load-pulling components such as the engine,  
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are  
forced to work harder against the drag of the added  
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively  
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra  
heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind  
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.  
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the  
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered  
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,  
follow the advice in this section and see your  
dealer/retailer for important information about  
towing a trailer with the vehicle.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Three important considerations have to do with weight:  
The weight of the trailer  
Pulling A Trailer  
Here are some important points:  
The weight of the trailer tongue  
There are many different laws, including speed limit  
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure  
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but  
also where you will be driving. A good source for  
this information can be state or provincial police.  
The total weight on the vehicle’s tires  
Weight of the Trailer  
How heavy can a trailer safely be?  
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles  
(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,  
transmission or other parts could be damaged.  
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle’s  
warranty.  
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).  
But even that can be too heavy.  
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,  
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how  
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all  
important. It can depend on any special equipment on  
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle  
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in  
this section for more information.  
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a  
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)  
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps  
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at  
the heavier loads.  
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the  
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required  
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional  
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle  
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.  
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission  
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often  
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.  
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.  
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted  
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph  
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.  
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or  
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.  
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for  
more information.  
Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is  
above 100°F (38°C).  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Weight of the Trailer Tongue  
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight  
to measure because it affects the total gross weight  
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)  
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo  
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the  
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,  
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the  
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also  
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a  
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW  
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.  
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19 for more  
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.  
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)  
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer  
weight (B).  
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the  
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.  
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving  
some items around in the trailer.  
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires  
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit  
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the  
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-19. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for  
the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hitches  
Safety Chains  
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.  
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads  
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.  
Here are some rules to follow:  
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the  
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of  
the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the  
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions  
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch  
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the  
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety  
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always  
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow  
safety chains to drag on the ground.  
The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for  
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other  
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted  
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.  
Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle  
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, then  
be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is  
removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water, and  
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaust  
can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on  
page 2-36 for more information.  
Trailer Brakes  
Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, do not tap into  
the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,  
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.  
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer  
brakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintained  
properly.  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving with a Trailer  
Passing  
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.  
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road.  
Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with  
the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind  
that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as  
responsive as the vehicle is by itself.  
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.  
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much  
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning  
to the lane.  
Backing Up  
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and  
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,  
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric  
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then  
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the  
brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection  
at the same time.  
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.  
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand  
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your  
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,  
have someone guide you.  
Making Turns  
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the  
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes  
are still working.  
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering  
could cause the trailer to come in contact with  
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged.  
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.  
Following Distance  
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than  
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft  
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.  
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in  
advance.  
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as  
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This  
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking  
and sudden turns.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer  
Parking on Hills  
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever  
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,  
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the  
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.  
{ CAUTION:  
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer  
attached can be dangerous. If something goes  
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be  
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be  
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on  
a flat surface.  
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel  
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned  
out. For this reason you may think other drivers are  
seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to  
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still  
working.  
Driving on Grades  
If parking the rig on a hill:  
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades  
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than  
normal engine and transmission temperatures  
may result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops  
are very important to allow the engine and  
transmission to cool.  
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)  
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill  
or into traffic if facing uphill.  
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer  
wheels.  
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting  
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is  
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so  
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.  
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the  
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.  
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking  
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).  
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the  
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce  
the possibility of the engine and the transmission  
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine  
Overheating on page 5-28.  
5. Release the brake pedal.  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Leaving After Parking on a Hill  
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing  
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:  
start the engine,  
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during  
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on  
page 5-28.  
shift into a gear, and  
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing  
release the parking brake.  
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,  
be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the  
vehicle before changing the tire.  
2. Let up on the brake pedal.  
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.  
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the  
chocks.  
Maintenance When Trailer Towing  
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a  
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
for more information. Things that are especially  
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission  
fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake  
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and  
during the trip.  
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts  
are tight.  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories and Modifications  
Service  
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added  
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and  
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,  
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,  
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,  
traction control, and stability control. Some of these  
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage  
not covered by the vehicle warranty.  
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.  
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and  
supported service people.  
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:  
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the  
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including  
control module modifications, are not covered under the  
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining  
warranty coverage for affected parts.  
GM Accessories are designed to complement and  
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM  
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine  
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/  
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that  
GM-trained and supported service technicians will  
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.  
Vehicle on page 1-69.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
California Proposition 65 Warning  
Doing Your Own Service Work  
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or  
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause  
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including  
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some  
component wear by-products contain and/or emit  
these chemicals.  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be injured and the vehicle could be  
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle  
without knowing enough about it.  
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,  
experience, the proper replacement parts, and  
tools before attempting any vehicle  
maintenance task.  
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other  
fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be  
easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are  
used, parts can later break or fall off. You could  
be hurt.  
California Perchlorate Materials  
Requirements  
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag  
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries  
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain  
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be  
necessary. For additional information, see  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper  
service manual. It tells you much more about how to  
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order  
the proper service manual, see Service Publications  
Ordering Information on page 7-16.  
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to  
do your own service work, see Servicing Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage  
and the date of any service work performed. See  
Maintenance Record on page 6-15.  
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred  
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you  
might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If  
this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher  
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the  
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or  
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs  
service.  
Adding Equipment to the Outside of  
the Vehicle  
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the  
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can  
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.  
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment  
to the outside of the vehicle.  
Gasoline Specifications  
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification  
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or  
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an  
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl  
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend  
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See  
Additives on page 5-6 for additional information.  
Fuel  
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the  
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the  
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,  
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP  
TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
California Fuel  
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions  
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet  
California specifications. See the underhood emission  
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting  
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate  
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but  
emission control system performance might be affected.  
Gasoline Octane  
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane  
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded  
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s  
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the  
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp on page 3-61. If this occurs, return to your  
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined  
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,  
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help  
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.  
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and  
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in  
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,  
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.  
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing  
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that  
were not designed for those fuels.  
Additives  
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States  
are now required to contain additives that help prevent  
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing  
the emission control system to work properly. In most  
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.  
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum  
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental  
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors  
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences  
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline  
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.  
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel  
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing  
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel  
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.  
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle  
warranty.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low  
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive  
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl  
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline  
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against  
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can  
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of  
the emission control system could be affected. The  
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,  
return to your dealer/retailer for service.  
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent  
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System  
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine  
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors  
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is  
the only gasoline additive recommended by General  
Motors.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuels in Foreign Countries  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
If you plan on driving in another country outside the  
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard  
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel  
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly  
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not  
be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away  
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended  
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law  
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while  
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel  
pump; never let children pump fuel.  
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or  
contact a major oil company that does business in the  
country where you will be driving.  
Filling the Tank  
{ CAUTION:  
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can  
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you  
and others, read and follow all the instructions on  
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are  
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or  
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel  
door on the driver side of the vehicle.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{ CAUTION:  
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap  
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something  
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray  
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more  
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and  
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the  
cap all the way.  
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in  
and release and it will open.  
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the  
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished  
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel  
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See  
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-90.  
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.  
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released  
too soon, it will spring back to the right.  
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the  
hook on the fuel door.  
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it  
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic  
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or  
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate  
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on  
page 3-61.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the  
Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is  
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-73 for more information.  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in  
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the  
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be  
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this  
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:  
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.  
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not  
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by  
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station  
attendant. Leave the area immediately.  
Do not fill a container while it is inside a  
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on  
any surface other than the ground.  
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside  
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.  
Contact should be maintained until the filling  
is complete.  
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.  
Do not use a cellular phone while  
pumping fuel.  
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get  
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one  
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit  
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator  
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and  
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
on page 3-61.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking Things Under  
the Hood  
{ CAUTION:  
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and  
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,  
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other  
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could  
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things  
that will burn onto a hot engine.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric fan under the hood can start up and  
injure you even when the engine is not running.  
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any  
underhood electric fan.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hood Release  
To lift the hood:  
1. Pull the hood release  
lever with this symbol  
on it. It is located on the  
lower left side of the  
instrument panel.  
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the  
secondary hood release lever, located near the  
center of the hood. Move the release lever up and  
to the right to raise the hood.  
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on  
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Compartment Overview  
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:  
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A. Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-95.  
Engine Oil  
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on  
page 5-38.  
Checking Engine Oil  
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding  
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid  
on page 5-32.  
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each  
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must  
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.  
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.  
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See  
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for  
the location of the engine oil dipstick.  
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23.  
E. Remote Negative () Terminal. See Jump Starting  
on page 5-38.  
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes  
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the  
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.  
F. Power Steering Fluid on page 5-31.  
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”  
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.  
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel  
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it  
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.  
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”  
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.  
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”  
under Brakes on page 5-33.  
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap and Dipstick  
(Out of View). See Automatic Transmission Fluid on  
page 5-19.  
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview on page 5-12 for  
the location of the engine  
oil fill cap.  
When to Add Engine Oil  
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of  
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the  
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil  
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see  
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper  
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the  
dipstick all the way back in when through.  
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has  
so much oil that the oil level gets above the  
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating  
range, the engine could be damaged.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M  
Standard designation can cause engine damage not  
covered by the vehicle warranty.  
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use  
Look for three things:  
SAE 5W-30  
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers  
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.  
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst  
symbol  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should have  
the starburst symbol on  
the container. This symbol  
indicates that the oil  
has been certified by the  
American Petroleum  
Institute (API).  
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a  
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this  
vehicle.  
GM4718M  
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil  
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain engine  
oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might not  
be available. You can add substitute oil designated  
SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.  
Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M  
should not be used for an oil change.  
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this  
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,  
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.  
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the system has calculated that oil life has been  
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.  
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the Driver  
Information Center (DIC) comes on. Change the oil as  
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).  
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the  
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is  
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and  
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this  
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has  
trained people who will perform this work using genuine  
parts and reset the system. It is also important to check  
the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.  
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil  
Flushes  
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils  
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are  
all that is needed for good performance and engine  
protection.  
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and  
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
Engine Oil Life System  
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be  
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil  
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever  
the oil is changed.  
When to Change Engine Oil  
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when  
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on  
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on  
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at  
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.  
For the oil life system to work properly, the system  
must be reset every time the oil is changed.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life  
System  
What to Do with Used Oil  
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be  
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.  
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean  
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good  
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or  
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s  
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.  
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change  
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever  
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate  
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs  
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL  
SOON message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)  
being turned on, reset the system.  
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you  
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the  
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in  
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into  
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a  
place that collects used oil.  
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE  
OIL SOON message must be reset:  
1. Turn the key to the ON/RUN position without  
starting the engine.  
2. Press the INFO button on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) until OIL LIFE REMAINING is  
displayed. See DIC Operation and Displays on  
page 3-68.  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for  
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.  
3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until 100%  
is displayed. This resets the oil life indicator.  
When to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.  
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes  
back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil  
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.  
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II  
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each  
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you  
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter  
at each engine oil change.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter and any loose  
debris that may be found in the air cleaner base.  
4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.  
How to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the  
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust  
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is  
required.  
To reinstall the cover:  
1. Align the two hinges located on the inboard side of  
the cover.  
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the  
engine to engage the tabs in the hinges and  
align the two screws.  
To inspect or replace the filter:  
3. Tighten the two screws on the top of the engine air  
cleaner/filter cover.  
{ CAUTION:  
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off  
can cause you or others to be burned. The air  
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop  
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and  
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not  
drive with it off, and be careful working on the  
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.  
1. Remove the two screws on the top of the engine air  
cleaner/filter cover.  
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can  
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get  
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have  
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.  
2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an angle  
while pulling toward you. This is necessary due to the  
two hinges located on the inboard side of the cover.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage  
your transmission. Too much can mean that some  
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine  
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.  
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to  
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you  
check your transmission fluid.  
Automatic Transmission Fluid  
When to Check and Change Automatic  
Transmission Fluid  
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid  
level is when the engine oil is changed.  
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the  
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:  
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in  
Additional Required Services on page 6-5, and be sure  
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.  
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).  
At high speed for quite a while.  
How to Check Automatic Transmission  
Fluid  
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.  
While pulling a trailer.  
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may  
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service  
department.  
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal  
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F  
(82°C to 93°C).  
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions  
here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.  
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles  
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F  
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have  
to drive longer.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking the Fluid Level  
Prepare the vehicle as follows:  
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine  
running.  
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever  
in P (Park).  
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift  
lever through each gear range, pausing for about  
three seconds in each range. Then, position  
the shift lever in P (Park).  
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.  
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:  
1. Locate the transmission fluid cap which is located  
next to the radiator hose and below the engine air  
cleaner/filter assembly on the driver side of the  
vehicle. The cap is marked TRANS FLUID.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12  
for more information on location.  
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the  
lower level. The fluid level must be in the  
cross-hatched area.  
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push  
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the  
handle clockwise.  
2. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter assembly  
to reach the transmission fluid cap, turn the cap  
counterclockwise to remove. Pull out the dipstick  
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.  
6. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter assembly.  
3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and  
then pull it back out again.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission  
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages  
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.  
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed  
page 6-11.  
How to Add Automatic Transmission  
Fluid  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what  
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.  
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as  
described under “How to Check Automatic  
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.  
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper  
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the  
dipstick.  
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the  
dipstick back in all the way and turn the handle  
clockwise.  
1. Pull out the dipstick.  
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the  
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.  
It does not take much fluid, generally less than  
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cooling System  
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.  
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar  
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap  
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can  
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator  
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could  
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)  
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs  
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the  
vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can  
start up even when the engine is not running and  
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
Engine Coolant  
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with  
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed  
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles  
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.  
{ CAUTION:  
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,  
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you  
can be burned.  
The following explains the cooling system and how to  
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a  
problem with engine overheating, see Engine  
Overheating on page 5-28.  
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run  
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could  
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.  
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else  
needs to be added. This mixture:  
What to Use  
Gives freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C),  
{ CAUTION:  
outside temperature.  
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),  
engine temperature.  
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can  
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid  
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant  
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system  
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain  
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get  
too hot but you would not get the overheat  
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or  
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of  
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
Protects against rust and corrosion.  
Will not damage aluminum parts.  
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.  
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the  
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The  
repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle  
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze  
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other  
parts.  
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used  
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could  
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of  
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the  
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill  
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could  
cause the engine to overheat and be severely  
damaged.  
Checking Coolant  
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking  
the coolant level.  
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery  
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is  
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If  
coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above  
the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant  
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool  
before this is done. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for  
more information.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can  
start up even when the engine is not running and  
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank  
{ CAUTION:  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.  
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.  
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss  
means there is still some pressure left.  
{ CAUTION:  
2. Keep turning the cap and remove it.  
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are  
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank  
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out  
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the  
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure  
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge  
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn  
the pressure cap.  
3. Fill the coolant  
surge tank with the  
proper mixture to  
the FULL COLD mark  
on the side of the  
coolant surge tank.  
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as  
follows:  
1. Remove the coolant  
surge tank pressure  
cap when the cooling  
system, including the  
coolant surge tank  
pressure cap and upper  
radiator hose, is no  
longer hot.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may  
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly  
secured.  
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.  
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,  
coolant loss and possible engine damage may  
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly  
secured.  
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully  
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more  
information on location.  
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar  
4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start the  
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper  
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine  
cooling fans.  
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant  
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add  
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank  
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on the  
side of the coolant surge tank.  
5. Replace the cap. Be sure the cap is hand-tight and  
fully seated.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle  
is parked on a level surface.  
Engine Overheating  
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine  
overheating.  
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are  
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should  
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run  
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.  
There is an engine temperature warning light and/or  
gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine  
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine  
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.  
The vehicle may also display a ENGINE OVERHEATED  
IDLE ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED  
STOP ENGINE message displayed in the Driver  
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-73 for more information. You will  
also hear a chime.  
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with  
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.  
The costly repairs would not be covered by  
the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine  
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-30 for  
information on driving to a safe place in an  
emergency.  
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning  
appears, but instead get service help right away.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine  
Compartment  
If No Steam Is Coming From The  
Engine Compartment  
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam  
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too  
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot  
when the vehicle:  
{ CAUTION:  
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you  
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away  
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming  
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the  
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign  
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.  
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.  
Stops after high-speed driving.  
Idles for long periods in traffic.  
Tows a trailer.  
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of  
steam:  
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is  
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or  
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it  
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the  
engine is cool.  
1. Turn the air conditioning off.  
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and  
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as  
necessary.  
on page 5-30 for information on driving to a safe  
place in an emergency.  
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) while  
stopped. If it safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to  
P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the  
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer  
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive  
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe  
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the  
warning does not come back on, continue to drive  
normally.  
Overheated Engine Protection  
Operating Mode  
If an overheated engine condition exists and the  
message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE is  
displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates  
firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.  
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and  
engine performance. This operating mode allows your  
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency.  
Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the  
overheat protection mode should be avoided.  
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the  
vehicle right away.  
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for  
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still  
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.  
Also, see ‘‘Overheated Engine Protection Operating  
Mode’’ next in this section.  
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine  
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,  
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.  
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the  
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil  
life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Check Power Steering Fluid  
Power Steering Fluid  
To check the power steering fluid:  
The power steering fluid  
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment  
cool down.  
reservoir is located next to  
the underhood fuse block  
on the passenger side of  
the vehicle. See Engine  
on page 5-12 for more  
information on location.  
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.  
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a  
clean rag.  
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.  
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on  
the dipstick.  
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.  
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the  
level up to the mark.  
When to Check Power Steering Fluid  
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid  
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or  
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system  
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected  
and repaired.  
What to Use  
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see  
Always use the proper fluid.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the  
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by  
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid  
page 6-11.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
What to Use  
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.  
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.  
Water can cause the solution to freeze and  
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of  
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as  
well as washer fluid.  
When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be  
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.  
If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the  
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has  
sufficient protection against freezing.  
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters  
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid  
expansion if freezing occurs, which could  
damage the tank if it is completely full.  
Adding Washer Fluid  
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will  
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)  
when the fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-73 for more information.  
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your  
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s  
windshield washer system and paint.  
Open the cap with the  
washer symbol on it.  
Add washer fluid until the  
tank is full. See Engine  
page 5-12 for reservoir  
location.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not  
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings  
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake  
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as  
necessary, only when work is done on the brake  
hydraulic system.  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
The brake master cylinder  
reservoir is filled with DOT  
3 brake fluid. See Engine  
page 5-12 for reservoir  
location and access.  
{ CAUTION:  
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the  
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You  
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could  
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is  
done on the brake hydraulic system.  
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in  
the reservoir might go down:  
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the  
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message displays in the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-73.  
The brake fluid level goes down because of normal  
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,  
the fluid level goes back up.  
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also  
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic  
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner  
or later the brakes will not work well.  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
What to Add  
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.  
Brake Wear  
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have  
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning  
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are  
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the  
time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the  
brake pedal firmly.  
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the  
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep  
dirt from entering the reservoir.  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic  
system, the brakes might not work well. This could  
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.  
The brake wear warning sound means that soon  
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an  
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is  
heard, have the vehicle serviced.  
Notice:  
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake  
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few  
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in  
the brake hydraulic system can damage brake  
hydraulic system parts so badly that they will  
have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in  
the wrong kind of fluid.  
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake  
pads could result in costly brake repair.  
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake  
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly  
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with  
the brakes.  
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted  
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be  
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If  
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing  
Your Vehicle on page 5-90.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect  
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the  
proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities  
and Specifications on page 5-103.  
Replacing Brake System Parts  
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many  
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if  
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle  
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.  
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for  
example, when the brake linings wear down and new  
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved  
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might  
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake  
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance  
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the  
worse. The braking performance expected can change in  
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts  
are installed.  
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  
axle sets.  
Brake Pedal Travel  
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not  
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in  
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service  
might be required.  
Brake Adjustment  
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the  
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery  
{ CAUTION:  
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is  
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one  
that has the replacement number shown on the original  
battery’s label.  
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related  
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California to cause  
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
A battery that is not properly vented can let  
sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear  
seat cushion. These fumes can damage the rear  
seat safety belt systems. You might not be able to  
see this damage and the safety belts might not  
provide the protection needed in a crash. If a  
replacement battery is ever needed, it must be  
vented in the same manner as the original battery.  
Always make sure that the vent hose is properly  
reattached before reinstalling the seat cushion.  
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion. To  
access the battery, see Rear Underseat Fuse Block  
on page 5-98. Access to the battery is not necessary to  
jump start the vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 5-38.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Storage  
{ CAUTION:  
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that  
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not  
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-38 for tips  
on working around a battery without getting hurt.  
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,  
remove the black, negative () cable from the battery.  
This helps keep the battery from running down.  
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,  
remove the black, negative () cable from the battery or  
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the  
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.  
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the  
vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached  
to the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery and  
the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the  
floor pan (E).  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly  
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered  
by the warranty.  
Jump Starting  
If the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to  
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start  
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it  
safely.  
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it  
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.  
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt  
battery with a negative ground system.  
{ CAUTION:  
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt  
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can  
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems  
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.  
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous  
because:  
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching  
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground  
connection you do not want. You would not be able  
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could  
damage the electrical systems.  
They contain acid that can burn you.  
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.  
They contain enough electricity to burn you.  
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or  
all of these things can hurt you.  
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set  
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved  
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic  
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission  
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories  
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be  
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the  
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other  
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.  
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug  
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off  
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This  
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And  
it could save the radio!  
4.6L LD8 Engine shown,  
4.6L L37 Engine similar  
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and  
negative () terminal locations on the other vehicle.  
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting  
terminal and a remote negative () jump starting  
terminal.  
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the  
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the  
vehicle. Lift the red plastic cap to access the terminal.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12  
for more information on the location of the remote  
positive (+) terminal.  
A second remote positive (+) terminal is located on  
the rear underseat fuse block.  
The remote negative () terminal is located behind  
the power steering pulley, near the engine cover.  
It is marked GND ().  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under the  
hood. It is located under the rear passenger’s seat.  
You will not need to access the battery for jump  
starting. The remote terminals are for that purpose.  
{ CAUTION:  
Using a match near a battery can cause battery  
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,  
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if  
you need more light.  
{ CAUTION:  
An electric fan can start up even when the engine  
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,  
clothing and tools away from any underhood  
electric fan.  
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not  
need to add water to the battery installed in your  
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be  
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,  
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,  
explosive gas could be present.  
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do  
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your  
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water  
and get medical help immediately.  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to  
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with  
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if  
the vehicle has one.  
{ CAUTION:  
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you  
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts  
once the engine is running.  
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to the  
negative () terminal location of the vehicle with  
the good battery. Use a remote negative () terminal  
if the vehicle has one.  
Do not let the other end of the cable touch anything  
until the next step. The other end of the negative ()  
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a  
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
negative () terminal on the vehicle with the dead  
battery.  
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or  
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a  
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.  
Before you connect the cables, here are some  
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to  
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the  
vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a heavy,  
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
9. Connect the other end of the negative () cable to  
the negative () terminal location on the vehicle  
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote  
negative () terminal marked GND ().  
negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Do not connect positive (+) to negative () or you  
will get a short that would damage the battery  
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the  
negative () cable to the negative () terminal on  
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.  
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  
the engine for a while.  
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.  
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs  
service.  
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remote  
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with  
the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal  
if the vehicle has one.  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or  
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may  
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would  
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always  
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct  
order, making sure that the cables do not touch  
each other or other metal.  
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do  
the following:  
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle that had the dead battery.  
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other  
vehicle.  
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its  
original position.  
Jumper Cable Removal  
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote  
Negative () Terminal (GND)  
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote  
Negative () Terminals  
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The vehicle should:  
Headlamp Aiming  
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming  
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and  
should need no further adjustment.  
Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from  
a light colored wall.  
Have all four tires on a level surface which is level  
all the way to the wall.  
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the  
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be  
necessary.  
Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.  
Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.  
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this  
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.  
Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while  
headlamp aiming is being performed.  
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your  
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be  
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the  
headlamps as described.  
Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one  
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.  
Have all tires properly inflated.  
Have the spare tire is in its original location in the  
vehicle.  
Notice: To make sure the headlamps are aimed  
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.  
Failure to follow these instructions could cause  
damage to headlamp parts.  
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam  
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly  
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To adjust the vertical aim:  
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11  
for more information.  
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to  
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.  
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of the  
vehicle at the wall where it was marked in Step 4.  
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam  
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may  
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause  
damage to the headlamp.  
2. Find the center line running through the lens of the  
headlamp.  
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece  
of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp  
not being aimed. This should allow only the beam of  
light from the headlamp being aimed to be seen on  
the flat surface.  
3. Record the distance from the ground to the center  
line running through the lens of the headlamp.  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is  
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape  
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct  
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the  
incorrect headlamp aim.  
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws. They  
are located under the hood near each headlamp  
assembly. First lift the flap to access either of them.  
Each one is the top outboard screw by the “V” on the  
cover panel next to the aiming flap.  
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite  
headlamp.  
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm  
hex wrench.  
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp  
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it  
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the  
angle of the beam.  
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at  
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bulb Replacement  
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by your  
dealer/retailer.  
Windshield Wiper Blade  
Replacement  
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear  
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
for more information on wiper blade inspection.  
Replacement blades come in different types and are  
removed in different ways. Here is how to remove  
the wiper blade:  
High Intensity Discharge (HID)  
Lighting  
1. Turn the engine off.  
2. Lift the windshield wiper arm and blade away from  
the windshield.  
{ CAUTION:  
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting  
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to  
service any of the system components, you could  
be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a  
qualified technician service them.  
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After an HID  
headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that  
the beam is a slightly different shade than it was  
originally. This is normal.  
3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point and  
pull the blade assembly down toward the windshield  
to remove it from the wiper arm.  
4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and  
firmly press down on the clip to snap it into place.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove and replace the wiper blade element:  
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at one  
end which are engaged by the bottom claw set of  
the wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiper  
blade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiper  
blade assembly.  
2. Replace the element by starting at the heel end of  
the wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the base  
of the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade element,  
notched end last, into the wiper blade claw sets.  
3. Engage the last claw into the notched end of the  
wiper blade element by squeezing the wiper blade  
element at the notched area, and push the wiper  
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.  
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are  
engaged by the last claw set and all the other claws  
are properly engaged in the slots of the wiper blade  
element on both sides.  
A. Correct Installation  
B. Incorrect Installation  
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,  
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires  
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever  
have questions about your tire warranty and where  
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet  
for details. For additional information refer to the tire  
manufacturer.  
Underinflated tires pose the same danger  
as overloaded tires. The resulting  
accident could cause serious injury.  
Check all tires frequently to maintain the  
recommended pressure. Tire pressure  
should be checked when your tires are  
page 5-57.  
{ CAUTION:  
Overinflated tires are more likely to be  
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden  
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.  
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If  
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires  
have been damaged, replace them.  
Poorly maintained and improperly used  
tires are dangerous.  
Overloading your tires can cause  
overheating as a result of too much  
flexing. You could have an air-out and a  
serious accident. See Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-19.  
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-59 for  
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed  
driving.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a  
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal  
safety guidelines.  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded into its  
sidewall.  
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):  
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code  
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the  
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards.  
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire  
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the  
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the  
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both  
sides of the tire, although only one side may have  
the date of manufacture.  
Passenger Car Tire Example  
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of  
letters and numbers used to define a particular  
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type  
and service description. See the “Tire Size”  
illustration later in this section for more detail.  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number  
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire  
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on  
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and  
temperature resistance. For more information see  
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
For information on recommended tire pressure see  
the Vehicle on page 4-19.  
Compact Spare Tire Example  
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact  
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of  
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should  
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).  
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when  
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. See  
Spare Tire on page 5-85 and If a Tire Goes Flat on  
page 5-74.  
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire  
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the  
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the  
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both  
sides of the tire, although only one side may have  
the date of manufacture.  
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57  
and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.  
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or  
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi  
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure  
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-57 and Spare Tire on page 5-85.  
Light Truck Tire Example  
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and  
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect  
ratio, construction type and service description.  
The letter T as the first character in the tire size  
means the tire is for temporary use only.  
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination  
of letters and numbers used to define a particular  
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction  
type and service description. See the “Tire Size”  
illustration later in this section for more detail.  
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a  
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal  
safety guidelines.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a  
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal  
safety guidelines.  
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire  
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows  
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and  
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded  
onto both sides of the tire, although only one  
side may have the date of manufacture.  
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load  
that can be carried and the maximum pressure  
needed to support that load when used in a dual  
configuration.  
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number  
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load  
that can be carried and the maximum pressure  
needed to support that load when used as a single.  
For information on recommended tire pressure see  
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):  
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code  
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the  
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards.  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that  
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.  
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as  
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean  
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as  
it is wide.  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows an example of a  
tire size.  
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to  
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The  
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D  
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the  
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.  
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in  
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of  
a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the  
first character in the tire size means a passenger  
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the  
U. S. Tire and Rim Association.  
inches.  
(F) Service Description: These characters  
represent the load index and speed rating of the  
tire. The load index represents the load carry  
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed  
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to  
carry a load.  
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates  
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall  
to sidewall.  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in  
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or  
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat  
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-57.  
Tire Terminology and Definitions  
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the  
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the  
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per  
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).  
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with  
standard and optional equipment including the  
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but  
without passengers and cargo.  
Accessory Weight: This means the combined  
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of  
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,  
power steering, power brakes, power windows,  
power seats, and air conditioning.  
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall  
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance  
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)  
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code  
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),  
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify  
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,  
and date of production.  
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height  
to its width.  
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located  
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be  
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.  
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped  
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.  
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See  
Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.  
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies  
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees  
to the centerline of the tread.  
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.  
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward  
when mounted on a vehicle.  
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating  
positions.  
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that  
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The  
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears  
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,  
and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper  
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of  
the tire.  
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.  
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light  
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger  
vehicles.  
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from  
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying  
capacity of a tire.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and  
multipurpose vehicles.  
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air  
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The  
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle  
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure  
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 5-57 and Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-19.  
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire  
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure  
for that tire.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of  
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity  
weight, and production options weight.  
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the  
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at  
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.  
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of  
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied  
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-19.  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which  
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
Standards): A tire information system that  
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s  
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are  
determined by tire manufacturers using  
the tire beads are seated.  
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread  
and the bead.  
government testing procedures. The ratings are  
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform  
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.  
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to  
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a  
tire can operate.  
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of  
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs  
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading  
the Vehicle on page 4-19.  
Traction: The friction between the tire and the  
road surface. The amount of grip provided.  
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into  
contact with the road.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an  
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory  
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.  
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes  
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a  
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.  
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67.  
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached  
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity  
weight and the original equipment tire size and  
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and  
Loading Information Label” under Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-19.  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached  
to the vehicle’s center pillar. This label lists your  
vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows the  
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they  
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation  
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum  
amount of air pressure needed to support your  
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.  
Inflation - Tire Pressure  
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to  
operate effectively.  
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that  
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is  
not. If your tires do not have enough air  
(under-inflation), you can get the following:  
For additional information regarding how much  
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of  
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading  
the Vehicle on page 4-19. How you load your  
vehicle affects the vehicle handling and ride  
comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight  
than it was designed to carry.  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Premature or irregular wear  
Poor handling  
Reduced fuel economy  
When to Check  
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),  
you can get the following:  
Unusual wear  
Poor handling  
Rough ride  
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not  
forget to check the spare tire. If your vehicle has a  
compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).  
For additional information see Spare Tire on  
page 5-85.  
Needless damage from road hazards  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Check  
Professional Vehicle  
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire  
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly  
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires  
may look properly inflated even when they are  
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure  
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle  
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven  
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
The proper inflation of the tires on your professional  
vehicle depends on the type of tires on it.  
If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires, the  
cold inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).  
If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size tires, the  
cold inflation pressure depends on the vehicle  
mass and should be determined by the vehicle  
coach-builder. A Tire and Loading Information  
label provided by the final stage manufacturer  
should be attached to the B-pillar on the  
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the final stage  
manufacturer’s label is not present, the  
coach-builder should be consulted. Do not use  
the tire pressures indicated on the General  
Motors label. These tire pressures are for the  
incomplete vehicle and are not the correct tire  
pressures for the completed professional  
vehicle.  
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.  
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a  
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation  
pressure matches the recommended pressure on  
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further  
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is  
low, add air until you reach the recommended  
amount.  
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on  
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.  
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.  
Operation at inflation pressures below this  
recommendation may cause your tires to become  
overloaded.  
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve  
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt  
and moisture.  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18 size  
tires, and you will be driving at speeds of 100 mph  
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold  
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure  
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),  
whichever is lower. See the example following.  
High-Speed Operation  
{ CAUTION:  
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or  
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained  
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up  
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have  
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some  
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure  
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed  
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle  
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires  
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent  
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation  
pressure for the vehicle load.  
Example:  
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure  
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near  
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum  
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.  
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for  
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).  
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires  
to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on  
page 4-19.  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper  
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to  
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has  
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS  
low tire pressure telltale.  
Tire Pressure Monitor System  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio  
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The  
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your  
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a  
receiver located in the vehicle.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS  
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is  
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator  
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When  
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will  
flash for approximately one minute and then remain  
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue  
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the  
malfunction exists.  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be  
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation  
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer  
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.  
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size  
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure  
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation  
pressure for those tires.)  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system  
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as  
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of  
reasons, including the installation of replacement or  
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the  
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS  
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or  
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or  
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to  
function properly.  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been  
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)  
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one  
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale  
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as  
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper  
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire  
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.  
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire  
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling  
and stopping ability.  
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-61 for  
additional information.  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada  
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation  
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System  
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when  
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are  
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding  
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors  
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and  
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located  
in the vehicle.  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on  
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
When a low tire pressure  
condition is detected, the  
TPMS illuminates the low  
tire pressure warning light  
located on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and  
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a  
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center  
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the  
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle  
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the  
driver. For additional information and details about the  
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and  
on page 3-73.  
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message  
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the  
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the  
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light  
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the  
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message  
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC  
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the  
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can  
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come  
on are:  
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool  
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then  
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early  
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting  
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.  
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your  
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original  
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for  
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-19, for an example of the Tire and  
Loading Information label and its location on your  
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.  
One of the road tires has been replaced with the  
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS  
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC  
message should go off once you re-install the road  
tire containing the TPMS sensor.  
The TPMS sensor matching process was started but  
not completed or not completed successfully after  
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and  
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS  
sensor matching process is performed successfully.  
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this  
section.  
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire  
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire  
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on  
page 5-65 and Tires on page 5-48.  
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire  
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor  
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered  
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or  
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS  
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS  
sensors are installed and the sensor matching  
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/  
retailer for service.  
TPMS Sensor Matching Process  
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any  
time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or more  
of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will need to  
be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors  
are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following  
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,  
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using  
a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for  
service.  
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your  
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires  
and wheels other than those recommended for your  
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning  
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-68.  
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/  
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air  
pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not  
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the  
tire’s sidewall.  
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities  
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS  
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.  
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a  
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if  
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on  
and stays on.  
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the  
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure  
gage, or a key.  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel  
position, and five minutes overall to match all four  
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to  
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes  
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching  
process stops and you need to start over.  
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,  
confirms that the sensor identification code has  
been matched to this tire and wheel position.  
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat  
the procedure in Step 5.  
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat  
the procedure in Step 5.  
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:  
1. Set the parking brake.  
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the  
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to  
indicate the sensor identification code has been  
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS  
sensor matching process is no longer active.  
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC  
display screen goes off.  
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the  
engine off.  
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s  
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for  
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice  
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE  
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC  
screen.  
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.  
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure  
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading  
Information label.  
4. Start with the driver side front tire.  
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.  
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or  
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,  
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,  
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Inspection and Rotation  
We recommend that you regularly inspect your  
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of  
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New  
Tires on page 5-67 for more information.  
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles  
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 6-4.  
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve  
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This  
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform  
most like it did when the tires were new.  
Four-Tire Rotation Pattern  
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should  
not be included in the tire rotation process. Use the  
four-tire rotation pattern shown.  
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires  
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.  
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When  
Replacement on page 5-71 for more information.  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor  
System (TPMS) will need to have the sensors  
reset after a tire rotation is performed. See  
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly  
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under  
{ CAUTION:  
Five-Tire Rotation Pattern  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after time. The wheel could  
come off and cause an accident. When you  
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from  
places where the wheel attaches to the  
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a  
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure  
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if  
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See  
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74.  
A five-tire rotation pattern may be used for your  
professional vehicle, if it has a full-size spare tire  
and wheel assembly that matches the original  
equipment tires and wheels in size, type and brand.  
The correct five-tire rotation pattern is shown.  
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front  
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the  
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading  
the Vehicle on page 4-19.  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You need new tires if any of the following statements  
are true:  
When It Is Time for New Tires  
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,  
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions  
influence when you need new tires.  
You can see the indicators at three or more places  
around the tire.  
You can see cord or fabric showing through the  
tire’s rubber.  
One way to tell when it is  
time for new tires is to  
check the treadwear  
indicators, which will  
appear when your tires  
have only 1/16 inch  
(1.6 mm) or less of  
tread remaining.  
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged  
deep enough to show cord or fabric.  
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.  
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that  
cannot be repaired well because of the size or  
location of the damage.  
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are  
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your  
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this  
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading  
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With  
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out  
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about  
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult  
the tire manufacturer for more information.  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Buying New Tires  
{ CAUTION:  
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your  
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your  
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General  
Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC  
Spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,  
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the  
same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will  
continue to have tires that are designed to give the  
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal  
use, as the original tires.  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of  
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of  
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and  
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle  
properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires  
of different sizes, brands, or types may also cause  
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct  
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.  
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a  
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall  
performance of your vehicle, including brake system  
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire  
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec  
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire  
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC  
Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and  
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-49 for  
additional information.  
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire and  
wheel assembly. If the vehicle has a compact  
spare tire and wheel, they have the same overall  
diameter as your vehicle’s full-size tires and  
wheels. Because they were designed and  
developed for use on your vehicle, it is all right to  
drive your vehicle with the compact spare installed  
properly. Compact spare tires are designed for  
temporary use only. See Spare Tire on page 5-85.  
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is  
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep  
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires  
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect  
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.  
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-65 for  
information on proper tire rotation.  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Different Size Tires and Wheels  
{ CAUTION:  
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than  
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect  
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride  
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance  
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic  
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and  
electronic stability control, the performance of these  
systems can be affected.  
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the  
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after  
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel  
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only  
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.  
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do  
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the  
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction  
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s  
original tires.  
{ CAUTION:  
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may  
not provide an acceptable level of performance and  
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels  
are selected. You may increase the chance that you  
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM  
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your  
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM  
certified technician.  
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system  
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if  
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.  
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure  
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning  
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See  
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the  
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading the  
Vehicle on page 4-19, for more information about the Tire  
and Loading Information Label and its location on your  
vehicle.  
See Buying New Tires on page 5-68 and Accessories  
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Treadwear  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based  
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified government  
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would  
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the  
government course as a tire graded 100. The  
relative performance of tires depends upon the  
actual conditions of their use, however, and may  
depart significantly from the norm due to variations  
in driving habits, service practices, and differences  
in road characteristics and climate.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on  
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA  
Temperature A  
The following information relates to the  
system developed by the United States National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),  
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and  
temperature performance. This applies only to  
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are  
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car  
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)  
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type  
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare  
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are  
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s  
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under  
controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C  
may have poor traction performance.  
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some  
limited-production tires.  
While the tires available on General Motors  
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with  
respect to these grades, they must also conform  
to federal safety requirements and additional  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)  
standards.  
5-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Temperature – A, B, C  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,  
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the  
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive  
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The  
grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the  
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.  
Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  
minimum required by law. It should be noted that  
the temperature grade for this tire is established for  
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive  
loading, either separately or in combination, can  
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and  
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest  
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to  
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary  
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire  
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the  
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your  
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires  
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your  
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.  
Wheel Replacement  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted  
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,  
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the  
wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can  
sometimes be repaired. See your GM dealer/retailer if  
any of these conditions exist.  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your GM dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel  
you need.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying  
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the  
same way as the one it replaces.  
lose control. You could have a collision in which  
you or others could be injured. Always use the  
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for  
replacement.  
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,  
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)  
sensors, replace them only with new GM original  
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the  
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors  
for your vehicle.  
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems  
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or  
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,  
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain  
clearance to the body and chassis.  
{ CAUTION:  
If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels have  
a unique offset and bolt hole diameter. Each of the  
wheels on the professional vehicle have eight wheels  
nuts. The wheels on the non-professional vehicle  
have five wheel nuts. See Changing a Flat Tire on  
page 5-74 for more information.  
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,  
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.  
It could affect the braking and handling of your  
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Used Replacement Wheels  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle  
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could  
cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or  
others may be injured in a crash.  
{ CAUTION:  
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.  
You cannot know how it has been used or how far  
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and  
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use  
a new GM original equipment wheel.  
Use another type of traction device only if its  
manufacturer recommends it for use on the  
vehicle and tire size combination and road  
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.  
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,  
readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the  
vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If  
you do find traction devices that will fit, install  
them on the front tires.  
Tire Chains  
{ CAUTION:  
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough  
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without  
the proper amount of clearance can cause  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a Tire Goes Flat  
{ CAUTION:  
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,  
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.  
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out  
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here  
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:  
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do  
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the  
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack  
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for  
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,  
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the  
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with  
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.  
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls  
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.  
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to  
a stop well out of the traffic lane.  
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a  
skid and may require the same correction you would use  
in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the  
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by  
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be  
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently  
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.  
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the  
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.  
Changing a Flat Tire  
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage  
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard  
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on  
page 3-6.  
5-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following  
example as a guide to assist you in the placement  
of wheel blocks (A).  
{ CAUTION:  
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle  
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or  
other people. You and they could be badly injured  
or even killed. Find a level place to change your  
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:  
1. Set the parking brake firmly.  
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).  
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while  
the vehicle is raised.  
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the  
vehicle.  
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,  
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the  
tire farthest away from the one being changed.  
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the  
opposite end of the vehicle.  
A. Wheel Block  
B. Flat Tire  
The following information explains how to use the jack  
and change a tire.  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools  
The equipment needed is in the trunk. To access  
the equipment:  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13 for more  
information.  
2. Press the area at the  
front of the handle  
located on the cover  
so that the back edge  
raises.  
4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer that holds  
the wrench and jack.  
5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and spare tire from  
the trunk. See Spare Tire on page 5-85 for more  
information.  
3. Grab the handle and  
remove the cover.  
5-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing the Flat Tire and  
Installing the Spare Tire  
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing  
a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more information.  
The tools to be used are the jack (A) and the wheel  
wrench (B).  
2. For models having aluminum wheels with a center  
wheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel wrench to  
gently pry the wheel covers off. Store the wheel  
cover and lug nut caps in the trunk until you have the  
flat tire repaired or replaced. Be careful not to scratch  
the aluminum wheel edge and do not try to remove it  
with your hands. Then loosen the wheel nuts with the  
wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosen them using  
the wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.  
4. Find the jacking location from the diagram above  
and use the corresponding cutouts located in the  
plastic molding.  
The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm) from the  
rear edge of the front wheel well, and the rear  
location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm) from the front  
edge of the rear wheel well.  
The notches may also be labeled JACK with an  
arrow pointing to the jacking location on the vehicle.  
5-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the  
jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.  
{ CAUTION:  
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is  
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you  
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a  
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.  
{ CAUTION:  
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly  
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make  
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and  
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into  
the proper location before raising the vehicle.  
6. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly into  
the channel of the jack head.  
7. Put the spare tire near you.  
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker  
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could  
break the molding and/or cause other damage to your  
vehicle. Always position the jack so that when the  
jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the notch  
located inboard from the rocker molding.  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Remove all wheel nuts and the flat tire.  
10. Remove any rust or dirt  
from the wheel bolts,  
mounting surfaces, and  
spare wheel.  
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle  
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the  
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.  
5-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
{ CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it  
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose  
after time. The wheel could come off and cause  
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any  
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches  
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a  
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a  
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the  
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on  
page 5-74.  
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because  
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel  
could fall off, causing a crash.  
12. Put the wheel nuts back  
on with the rounded  
end of the nuts toward  
the wheel. Tighten each  
nut by hand until the  
wheel is held against  
the hub.  
11. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{ CAUTION:  
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly  
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose  
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened  
with a torque wrench to the proper torque  
specification after replacing. Follow the torque  
specification supplied by the aftermarket  
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel  
page 5-103 for original equipment wheel nut  
torque specifications.  
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle  
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.  
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can  
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid  
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel  
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque  
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on  
page 5-103 for the wheel nut torque specification.  
5-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and  
Tools  
{ CAUTION:  
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the  
passenger compartment of the vehicle could  
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose  
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in  
the proper place.  
5-Wheel Nuts  
8-Wheel Nuts  
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross  
sequence as shown.  
After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle, store  
the flat tire in your trunk.  
If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers,  
screw the nut covers on with your fingers, then  
tighten one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench.  
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.  
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment  
in the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised  
until the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.  
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s  
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the  
compact spare, the cover or the spare could be  
damaged.  
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace  
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon  
as you can.  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A. Cover  
B. Wing Nut  
C. Retainer  
D. Jack and Wheel Wrench  
E. Jack Container  
F. Spare Tire  
G. Bolt  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13.  
2. Reinstall the spare tire (F), face down, making sure  
to line up the wheel center hole with the bolt (G)  
and place it on the compartment floor.  
3. Insert the jack container (E) into the spare tire (F).  
Then insert the jack and wheel wrench (D) into the  
center of the spare tire making sure to line up  
the wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) on the  
compartment floor.  
4. Secure the spare tire and the jack container with  
the retainer (C) and then the wing nut (B).  
5. Reinstall the spare tire cover (A).  
5-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.  
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage  
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the compact  
spare.  
Spare Tire  
Compact Spare Tire  
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire. Although  
the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle  
was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation  
pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).  
Spare Tire  
Your vehicle may have a spare tire, which, when new,  
was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose air over time, so  
check its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation -  
page 4-19 for information regarding proper tire inflation  
and loading your vehicle. For instructions on how to  
remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the  
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as  
soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly  
inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at  
speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to  
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and  
have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your  
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare  
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire  
will last longer and be in good shape in case it is  
needed again.  
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should  
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is  
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road  
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and  
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire  
will be available in case you need it again.  
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not  
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with  
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the  
rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other  
parts of the vehicle.  
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than  
the road tire originally installed on your vehicle.  
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,  
so it is all right to drive on it.  
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.  
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your  
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and type,  
do not include the spare in the tire rotation.  
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with  
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the  
spare tire and its wheel together.  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning  
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass  
and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger.  
When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a  
soft cloth and glass cleaner.  
Appearance Care  
Interior Cleaning  
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is  
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and  
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage  
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular  
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the  
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from  
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be  
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior  
may experience extremes of heat that could cause  
stains to set rapidly.  
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become  
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before  
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions  
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,  
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s  
doors and windows.  
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs  
using a small brush with soft bristles.  
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s upholstery  
and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained from your  
dealer/retailer.  
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent  
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments  
that transfer color to home furnishings may also  
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.  
Do not clean the vehicle using:  
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil  
from any interior surface.  
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners  
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.  
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on  
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass  
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray  
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,  
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.  
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s  
interior surfaces.  
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a  
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage  
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness  
of soil removal.  
5-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To clean:  
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with  
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and  
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops  
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.  
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.  
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or  
club soda.  
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.  
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub  
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean  
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.  
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.  
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that  
can damage the vehicle’s interior.  
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the  
cleaning cloth remains clean.  
Fabric/Carpet  
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild  
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process  
that was used with plain water.  
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment  
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister  
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used  
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,  
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.  
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as  
possible using one of the following techniques:  
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner  
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial  
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small  
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned  
area gives any impression that a ring formation may  
result, clean the entire surface.  
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper  
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel  
until no more can be removed.  
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper  
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the  
fabric or carpet.  
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and  
then vacuum.  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam to clean  
leather. Never use spot lifters or spot removers on  
leather. It is very important to not use any commercial  
leather cleaners or coatings that are sold to preserve  
and protect leather. Not only are those products not  
necessary, they will permanently and adversely change  
the appearance and feel of the leather. Never use  
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing  
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior. Never use  
shoe polish on leather.  
Leather  
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove  
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft  
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.  
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.  
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters  
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather  
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and  
protect leather may permanently change the appearance  
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not  
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing  
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because  
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a  
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.  
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other  
Plastic Surfaces  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove  
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean  
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be  
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters  
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial  
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and  
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change  
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not  
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based  
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean  
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the  
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform  
manner.  
TEHAMA™ Leather  
The leather surface on the seat was not designed to be  
aggressively cleaned using any commercial product. Use  
a well wrung cloth dampened with water to remove dust.  
Do not use a wet cloth or saturate the leather surface with  
water. Allow the leather to dry naturally. If a soil occurs  
that cannot be completely removed, allow it to become  
part of the natural markings of the leather. The leather in  
the vehicle was designed to have a natural appearance  
and develop a more vintage appearance with use.  
5-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some commercial products may increase gloss on  
the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause  
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make  
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain  
conditions.  
Care of Safety Belts  
Keep belts clean and dry.  
{ CAUTION:  
Wood Panels  
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely  
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able  
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts  
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.  
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use  
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately  
with a clean cloth.  
Speaker Covers  
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the  
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with  
just water and mild soap.  
Weatherstrips  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply  
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,  
damp weather frequent application may be required. See  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter  
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer  
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use  
of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can  
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.  
Washing Your Vehicle  
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep  
it clean by washing it often.  
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can  
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.  
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that  
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it  
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would  
not be covered by the warranty.  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses  
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car  
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow  
instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-90.  
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car  
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are  
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as  
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the  
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained  
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’  
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary  
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any  
vehicle care product.  
Finish Care  
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by  
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint  
finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from  
your dealer/retailer.  
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the  
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are  
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint  
finish.  
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to  
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are  
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.  
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive  
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish  
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and  
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint  
finish on the vehicle.  
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton  
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.  
5-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird  
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,  
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on  
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.  
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked  
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.  
Windshield and Wiper Blades  
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.  
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper  
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild  
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when  
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a  
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper  
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or  
damaged.  
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather  
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period  
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep  
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.  
Wipers can be damaged by:  
Extreme dusty conditions  
Sand and salt  
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts  
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep  
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually  
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on  
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.  
Heat and sun  
Snow and ice, without proper removal  
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging  
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or  
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed  
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted  
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,  
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,  
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on  
them because they could damage the surface. Do not  
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.  
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels  
and Trim  
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated  
wheels.  
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild  
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing  
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then  
be applied.  
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels  
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not  
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome  
polish on chrome wheels only.  
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may  
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving  
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,  
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are  
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.  
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and  
water after exposure.  
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but  
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off  
immediately after application.  
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic  
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning  
brushes, could damage the aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be  
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive  
a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated  
wheels through an automatic car wash that uses  
silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.  
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive  
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain  
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could  
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs  
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.  
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels.  
5-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires  
Underbody Maintenance  
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.  
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  
control can collect on the underbody. If these are  
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the  
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,  
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion  
protection.  
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing  
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish  
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always  
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces  
on the vehicle.  
At least every spring, flush these materials from the  
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud  
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the  
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your  
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can  
do this.  
Sheet Metal Damage  
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop  
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or  
replaced to restore corrosion protection.  
Chemical Paint Spotting  
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide  
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle  
warranty.  
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a  
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can  
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and  
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.  
Finish Damage  
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish  
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode  
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.  
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will  
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of  
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,  
whichever occurs first.  
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up  
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger  
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your  
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service Parts Identification Label  
Vehicle Identification  
This label is on the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if  
parts need to be ordered. The label has the following  
information:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Model designation  
Paint information  
Production options and special equipment  
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.  
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a  
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the  
driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from  
outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle  
Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates  
of title and registration.  
Electrical System  
Add-On Electrical Equipment  
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle  
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some  
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and  
the damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s  
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can  
keep other components from working as they should.  
Engine Identification  
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This  
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,  
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”  
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-103 for  
the vehicle’s engine code.  
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if  
the vehicle is not operating.  
5-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to  
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing  
Fuses and Circuit Breakers  
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from  
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit  
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires  
caused by electrical problems.  
Headlamp Wiring  
The headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses. An  
electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off,  
or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have the  
headlamp wiring checked right away.  
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the  
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you  
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size  
and rating.  
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have  
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same  
amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that you  
can get along without — like the radio or cigarette  
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.  
Replace it as soon as you can.  
Windshield Wiper Fuses  
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal  
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to  
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools  
and will then restart.  
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, there  
is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.  
Underhood Fuse Block  
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger  
side of the engine compartment. Remove the fuse cover  
and secondary service cover to access the fuse block.  
Power Windows and Other Power  
Options  
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components  
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the  
covers on any electrical component.  
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power  
windows and other power accessories. When the  
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and  
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or  
goes away.  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
Fuel Injectors Even  
Air Conditioning Clutch  
Engine Control Module (ECM),  
Crank  
Fuel Injectors Odd  
3
4
5
1
2
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid  
5-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
Usage  
Oxygen Sensor  
Emission Device  
Fuses  
23  
Usage  
6
7
8
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
(J-Case)  
Starter (J-Case)  
24  
Transmission, Ignition 1  
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Motor  
(J-Case)  
Cooling Fan 2 (J-Case)  
Cooling Fan 1 (J-Case)  
Windshield Washer Heater (J-Case)  
Engine Control Module (ECM),  
25  
9
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)  
26  
27  
28  
Climate Control System, Instrument  
Panel Cluster Ignition 1  
Airbag System  
Horn  
Windshield Wiper  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
Relays  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
Usage  
Powertrain  
Starter  
Cooling Fan 2  
Cooling Fan 3  
Fog Lamps  
Right High-Beam Headlamp  
Left High-Beam Headlamp  
Left Low-Beam Headlamp  
Right Low-Beam Headlamp  
Windshield Washer Pump Motor  
Left Front Cornering Lamp  
Right Front Cornering Lamp  
Air Pump (J-Case)  
Cooling Fan 1  
Air Conditioning Clutch  
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid  
Ignition  
37  
Air Pump  
5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Underseat Fuse Block  
The rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on  
the driver side. The rear seat cushion must be removed  
to access the rear fuse block.  
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion  
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the  
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a short  
that could damage the battery and or wires. Avoid  
contact between the rear seat and the fuse  
center whenever you remove or reinstall the rear  
seat. Do not remove covers from any of the covered  
parts, and do not store anything under the seats.  
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:  
To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up on the  
cover latch, located at the end of the fuse block, near  
the battery cable.  
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the  
front hooks.  
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the  
vehicle.  
5-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
not been routed through the seat cushion at all, it  
will not be there to work for the next passenger.  
The person sitting in that position could be badly  
injured. After reinstalling the seat cushion, always  
check to be sure that the safety belts are properly  
routed and are not twisted.  
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,  
then route the safety belts through the proper slots  
in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts  
get twisted.  
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the  
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into  
the wire loops on the back frame.  
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and  
then press down on the seat cushion until the  
spring locks on both ends engage.  
{ CAUTION:  
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly  
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is  
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat  
cushion is secured.  
A safety belt that is not properly routed through  
the seat cushion or is twisted will not provide the  
protection needed in a crash. If the safety belt has  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
Right Park Lamp  
Engine Control Module (ECM)/  
Transmission Control Module (TCM)  
1
2
3
Fuel Pump  
4
Left Park Lamp  
Run 3 - Rear Blower  
5
5-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
Usage  
Memory Module  
Right Park Lamp (optional)  
Steering Wheel Illumination  
Front Heated/Cooled Seat Module  
Run 2 - Heated/Cooled Seats,  
Heated Washer Fluid  
Rear Heated Seat Module  
RPA Module  
PASS-Key® III System  
Unlock/Lock Module  
Magnetic Ride Control  
Not Used  
Fuses  
Usage  
6
7
8
9
Body Control Module (Left Turn  
Signal)  
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power  
Outlet  
Navigation (Optional)  
Retained Accessory Power 1 (RAP)  
Passenger Door Module  
Sensing and Diagnostic Module  
Accessory Power Outlets  
Body Control Module (BCM)  
(Inadvertent)  
Retained Accessory Power 2 (RAP)  
Canister Vent Solenoid  
Body Control Module (Courtesy)  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
32  
33  
34  
35  
Sunroof  
Body Control Module (BCM) Dim  
Body Control Module (BCM)  
Run 1-Heated Steering Wheel  
Ignition Switch  
Driver Door Module  
Rear Lumbar  
Body Control Module (Right Turn  
Signal)  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
Trunk Release  
Amplifier, Radio  
Body Control Module (CHMSL)  
Body Control Module  
Stoplamp (optional)  
Electronic Leveling Control Module  
5-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
42  
Usage  
OnStar® Module  
Relays  
59  
Usage  
Fuel Pump  
43  
44  
45  
46  
Body Modules  
Radio  
Door Unlatch (optional)  
Rear Defogger (J-Case)  
60  
61  
62  
63  
License Plate Lamp (optional)  
Right Park Lamp (optional)  
Unlock  
Lock  
Electronic Leveling Control  
Compressor (J-Case)  
64  
65  
Run  
Not Used  
47  
48  
49  
Blower (J-Case) (optional)  
Blower (J-Case) (optional)  
66  
67  
Door Unlatch (optional)  
Trunk Release  
68  
69  
70  
Stoplamp (optional)  
Overhead Lamps (optional)  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
Resistor  
Usage  
Terminating Resistor  
50  
Relays  
51  
52  
Usage  
Front Blower (optional)  
Rear Defogger  
Electronic Leveling Control  
Compressor  
Circuit  
Usage  
Breakers  
54  
55  
56  
57  
Right Front Seat  
Left Front Power Seat  
Power Windows  
53  
58  
Park Lamps  
Power Tilt Steering Wheel  
5-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capacities and Specifications  
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.  
Capacities  
Application  
English  
Metric  
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge  
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located  
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more  
information.  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant  
Cooling System  
Engine Oil with Filter  
Fuel Tank  
12.6 qt  
7.5 qt  
12.0 L  
7.1 L  
18.5 gal  
7.4 qt  
70.0 L  
7.0 L  
Transmission  
Wheel Nut Torque  
100 lb ft  
140 Y  
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this  
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.  
Engine Specifications  
Engine  
4.6L DOHC V8 Engine  
4.6L DOHC V8 Engine  
VIN Code  
Transmission  
Spark Plug Gap  
0.050 in (1.27 mm)  
0.050 in (1.27 mm)  
Y
9
Automatic  
Automatic  
5-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
5-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle and the Environment  
Maintenance Schedule  
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep  
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps  
the environment. All recommended maintenance  
is important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even  
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper  
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the  
level of emissions from the vehicle. To help protect  
the environment, and to keep the vehicle in good  
condition, be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.  
Introduction  
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and  
change as recommended.  
Using the Maintenance Schedule  
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working  
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive  
it. You might drive very short distances only a few  
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the  
time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the  
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive  
it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.  
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan  
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty  
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer  
for details.  
Maintenance Requirements  
Because of all the different ways people use their  
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more  
frequent checks and replacements. So please read  
the following and note how you drive. If you have any  
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,  
see your dealer/retailer.  
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,  
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and  
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are  
necessary to keep this vehicle in good working  
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow  
scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the  
vehicle warranty.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This schedule is for vehicles that:  
Some maintenance services can be complex.  
So, unless you are technically qualified and have  
the necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer  
do these jobs.  
carry passengers and cargo within recommended  
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.  
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.  
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained  
and supported service technicians will perform the  
work using genuine parts.  
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  
driving limits.  
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane  
on page 5-5.  
To purchase service information, see Service  
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
should be performed when indicated. See Additional  
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.  
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells what  
should be checked, when to check it, and what  
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good  
condition.  
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to  
on page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure  
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all  
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else  
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine  
parts from your dealer/retailer.  
{ CAUTION:  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be  
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be  
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work  
only if you have the required know-how and the  
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have  
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a  
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your  
Own Service Work on page 5-4.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message  
appears, the following services, checks, and inspections  
are required:  
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on  
page 5-13. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life  
System on page 5-16. An Emission Control Service.  
Visually check for any leaks or damage.  
See footnote (k).  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace  
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.  
See footnote (m).  
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear.  
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-65 and  
“Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on  
page 6-9.  
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).  
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid  
levels and add fluid as needed.  
Perform any needed additional services.  
See “Additional Required Services” in this section.  
Inspect suspension and steering components.  
See footnote (b).  
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).  
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).  
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).  
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).  
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid  
Scheduled Maintenance  
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of  
the vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation  
service be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to  
8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for  
inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-48.  
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on  
page 5-65 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once  
a Month on page 6-9.  
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message  
displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), service  
is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced  
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles  
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best  
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate  
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.  
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at  
least once a year and at this time the system must  
be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service  
technicians who will perform this work using genuine  
parts and reset the system.  
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,  
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)  
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life  
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life  
System on page 5-16 for information on the Engine  
Oil Life System and resetting the system.  
as needed.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Required Services  
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)  
shown for each item.  
Additional Required Services  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
Inspect fuel system for damage or  
leaks.  
Inspect exhaust system for loose or  
damaged components.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter.  
page 5-17.  
Replace passenger compartment  
air filter. See footnote (g).  
Change automatic transmission  
fluid and filter (severe service).  
See footnote (h).  
Change automatic transmission fluid  
and filter (normal service).  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Required Services (cont’d)  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
Replace spark plugs. An Emission  
Control Service.  
Except Professional Vehicle: Engine  
cooling system service (or every  
five years, whichever occurs first).  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (j).  
Professional Vehicle Only: Engine  
cooling system service (or every  
five years, whichever occurs first).  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (j).  
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (l).  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system  
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or  
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the  
Restraint Systems on page 1-70.  
Maintenance Footnotes  
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper  
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc  
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.  
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking  
brake, etc.  
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges  
and latches, including those for the hood, rear  
compartment, glove box door, and console door.  
More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed  
to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on  
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last  
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.  
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and  
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or  
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses  
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.  
(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter  
may require replacement more often.  
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they  
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,  
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as  
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test  
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the  
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is  
recommended at least once a year.  
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the  
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these  
conditions:  
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.  
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or  
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,  
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn  
on page 5-46 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on  
page 5-91 for more information.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
When doing frequent trailer towing.  
Professional vehicle uses, such as limousine  
service.  
Uses such as high performance operation.  
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety  
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any  
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service  
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer  
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23  
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,  
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test  
the cooling system and pressure cap.  
At Each Fuel Fill  
It is important to perform these underhood checks at  
each fuel fill.  
Engine Oil Level Check  
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a  
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired  
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.  
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil  
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to  
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause  
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle  
warranty.  
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or  
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.  
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil  
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.  
(m) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect  
the filter at each engine oil change.  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Owner Checks and Services  
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant  
on page 5-23.  
These owner checks and services should be performed  
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle  
safety, dependability, and emission control performance.  
Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and  
services.  
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check  
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield  
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if  
necessary.  
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.  
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the  
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
At Least Once a Month  
Tire Inflation Check  
At Least Once a Year  
Starter Switch Check  
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are  
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to  
check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 5-57. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored  
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74.  
{ CAUTION:  
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle  
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or  
others could be injured.  
Tire Wear Inspection  
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway  
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service  
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,  
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on  
page 5-65.  
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough  
room around the vehicle.  
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular  
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.  
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to  
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.  
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle  
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the  
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your  
dealer/retailer for service.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock  
Control System Check  
Ignition Transmission Lock Check  
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn  
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.  
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only  
when the shift lever is in P (Park).  
{ CAUTION:  
The ignition key should come out only in  
LOCK/OFF.  
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle  
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or  
others could be injured.  
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.  
Parking Brake and Automatic  
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism  
Check  
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough  
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a  
level surface.  
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake  
on page 2-32.  
{ CAUTION:  
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if  
the vehicle begins to move.  
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could  
begin to move. You or others could be injured and  
property could be damaged. Make sure there is  
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once  
should the vehicle begin to move.  
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,  
but do not start the engine. Without applying the  
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out  
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever  
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer  
for service.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing  
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,  
set the parking brake.  
Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants  
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:  
With the engine running and the transmission  
in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from  
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle  
is held by the parking brake only.  
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part  
number, or specification can be obtained from your  
dealer/retailer.  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:  
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then  
release the parking brake followed by the regular  
brake.  
The engine requires a special  
engine oil meeting GM Standard  
GM4718M. Oils meeting this  
standard can be identified as  
synthetic, and should also be  
identified with the American  
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified  
for Gasoline Engines starburst  
symbol. However, not all synthetic  
API oils with the starburst symbol  
will meet this GM standard.  
Look for and use only oil that meets  
GM Standard GM4718M. For the  
proper viscosity, see Engine Oil  
on page 5-13.  
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.  
Underbody Flushing Service  
Engine Oil  
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any  
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care  
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other  
debris can collect.  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only DEX-COOL®  
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on  
page 5-23.  
Engine Coolant  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,  
in Canada 88862807).  
Hood Latch  
Assembly,  
Secondary  
Hydraulic Brake  
System  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,  
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant  
Windshield  
Washer  
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.  
Spring  
Anchor, and  
Release Pawl  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Chassis Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,  
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Parking Brake  
Cable Guides  
Hood and  
Door Hinges  
Weatherstrip Lubricant  
GM Power Steering Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,  
in Canada 89021186).  
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,  
Power Steering  
System  
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or  
Conditioning  
Dielectric Silicone Grease  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,  
in Canada 992887).  
Automatic  
DEXRON®-VI Automatic  
Transmission Transmission Fluid.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Key Lock  
Cylinders  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Replacement Parts  
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.  
Part  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element  
Engine Oil Filter  
GM Part Number  
22676970  
ACDelco Part Number  
A1627C  
89017342  
PF61  
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element  
Spark Plugs  
25906375  
CF118C  
12571535  
41–987  
Wiper Blades  
Driver Side – 21.7 in (55.0 cm)  
Passenger Side – 21.7 in (55.0 cm)  
15931977  
15931976  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Drive Belt Routing  
4.6L V8 Engines  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record  
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the  
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional  
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should  
retain all maintenance receipts.  
Maintenance Record  
Odometer  
Reading  
Date  
Serviced By  
Maintenance Stamp  
Services Performed  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Date  
Serviced By  
Maintenance Stamp  
Services Performed  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Date  
Serviced By  
Maintenance Stamp  
Services Performed  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Date  
Serviced By  
Maintenance Stamp  
Services Performed  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership  
management, it appears your concern cannot be  
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the  
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance  
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,  
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication  
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.  
Customer Assistance and  
Information  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to  
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns  
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle  
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service  
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best  
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can  
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your  
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:  
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in  
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the  
following information available to give the Customer  
Assistance Representative:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is  
available from the vehicle registration or title,  
or the plate at the top left of the instrument  
panel and visible through the windshield.  
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of  
dealership management. Normally, concerns can  
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has  
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts  
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or  
the general manager.  
Dealership name and location.  
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.  
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern  
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is  
why we suggest following Step One first.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors  
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are  
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,  
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the  
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can  
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto  
Line Program to enforce your rights.  
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the  
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following  
address:  
BBB Auto Line Program  
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.  
4200 Wilson Boulevard  
Suite 800  
Arlington, VA 22203-1838  
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program  
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus  
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or  
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
Although you may be required to resort to this informal  
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,  
use of the program is free of charge and your case will  
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree  
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and  
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
dr.bbb.org/goauto  
This program is available in all 50 states and the District  
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage  
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to  
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its  
participation in this program.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):  
For further information concerning eligibility in the  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call  
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors  
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777  
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to  
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following  
address:  
General Motors Participation in the  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been  
addressed after the following the procedure outlined in  
Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada Limited  
wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge  
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of  
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of  
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service  
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts  
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may  
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The  
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement  
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final  
decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.  
We believe our impartial program offers advantages over  
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,  
and free of charge.  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
c/o Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Mail Code: CA1–163–005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN).  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca  
Online Owner Center  
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of  
www.gm.ca where you can save information on  
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy  
tools and forms with greater ease.  
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —  
www.gmownercenter.com/cadillac  
Information and services customized for your specific  
vehicle — all in one convenient place.  
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you  
will have access to:  
Digital owner manual, warranty information,  
and more  
My Showroom: Find and save information on  
vehicles and current offers in your area.  
Online service and maintenance records  
Find Cadillac dealers for service nationwide  
Exclusive privileges and offers  
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address  
and phone number for each of your preferred GM  
dealers/retailers.  
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and  
service estimates, check trade-in values, or  
schedule a service appointment by adding the  
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.  
Recall notices for your specific vehicle  
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings  
summaries  
Other Helpful Links:  
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com  
Cadillac Merchandise — www.cadillaccollection.com  
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/helpcenter  
FAQ  
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools  
and forms with greater ease.  
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within  
www.gm.ca.  
Contact Us  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Canada — Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance for Text  
Telephone (TTY) Users  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,  
CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or  
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),  
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer  
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with  
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).  
www.gmcanada.com  
1-888-446-2000  
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112  
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)  
Customer Assistance Offices  
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free  
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to  
write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to:  
Overseas — Customer Assistance  
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.  
Mexico, Central America and  
Caribbean Islands/Countries  
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin  
Islands) — Customer Assistance  
United States — Customer Assistance  
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center  
Cadillac Motor Car Division  
P.O. Box 33169  
Detroit, MI 48232-5169  
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.  
Customer Assistance Center  
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740  
Col. Lomas de Bezares  
www.Cadillac.com  
1-800-458-8006  
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112  
From Puerto Rico:  
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.  
01-800-508-0000  
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800  
1-800-496-9992 (English)  
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)  
From U.S. Virgin Islands:  
1-800-496-9994  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM Mobility Reimbursement  
Program  
Roadside Service  
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.  
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.  
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  
Calling for Assistance  
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following  
information ready:  
Your name, home address, and home telephone  
number  
This program, available to qualified applicants, can  
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible  
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,  
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.  
Telephone number of your location  
Location of the vehicle  
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the  
vehicle  
The offer is available for a very limited period of time  
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more  
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit  
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance  
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,  
call 1-800-833-9935.  
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle  
Description of the problem  
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.  
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY  
users call 1-800-263-3830.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or  
Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for  
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and  
cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when  
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.  
Coverage  
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles  
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.  
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In  
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission  
from the owner is not covered.  
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a  
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,  
must be in good condition and properly inflated.  
It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement  
of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.  
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of  
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes  
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at  
any time without notification.  
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump  
start a dead battery.  
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve  
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or  
driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or  
the same type of claim is made many times.  
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North  
America are provided when requested either  
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.  
Additional travel information is also available.  
Allow three weeks for delivery.  
Cadillac Owner Privileges™  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:  
If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,  
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during  
the 5 year/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain  
warranty period. Items considered are hotel,  
meals, and rental car.  
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel  
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.  
Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the  
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may  
be available if you have OnStar®. For security  
reasons, the driver must present identification  
before this service is given.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service  
(U.S. only)  
Services Specific to Canadian  
Purchased Vehicles  
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately  
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.  
Propane and other fuels are not provided through  
this service.  
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an  
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac  
owner in the United States with the advantage of  
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a  
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide  
on-site service.  
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.  
Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.  
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a  
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.  
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your  
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each  
technician travels with a specially equipped service  
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and  
tools required to handle most roadside repairs.  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:  
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a  
copy of the repair orders are required. Once  
authorization has been received, the Roadside  
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements  
and explain how to receive payment.  
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be  
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance  
advisor may give you permission to get local  
emergency road service. You will receive payment,  
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to  
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be  
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for  
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner  
responsibility.  
Services Not Included in Roadside  
Assistance  
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.  
Legal fines.  
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,  
chains, or other traction devices.  
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a  
non-public road or highway.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Several courtesy transportation options are available to  
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty  
repairs are required.  
Scheduling Service Appointments  
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact  
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.  
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your  
service consultant of your transportation needs, your  
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.  
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty  
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with  
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage  
information.  
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service  
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be  
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is  
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,  
let them know this, and ask for instructions.  
Transportation Options  
Warranty service can generally be completed while you  
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps  
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several  
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,  
your dealer can offer you one of the following:  
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for  
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work  
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.  
Shuttle Service  
Courtesy Transportation  
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get  
you to your destination with minimal interruption of  
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip  
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)  
from the dealership.  
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our  
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy  
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles  
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage  
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and  
hybrid specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This requires that you sign and complete a rental  
agreement and meet state, local, and rental vehicle  
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may  
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,  
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage  
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,  
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond  
the completion of the repair.  
Public Transportation or Fuel  
Reimbursement  
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public  
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle  
service, the expense must be supported by original  
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount  
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for  
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation  
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for  
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim  
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported  
by original receipts. See your dealer for information  
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of  
fuel or other transportation costs.  
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a  
courtesy rental.  
Additional Program Information  
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be  
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer  
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy  
Transportation arrangements will be administered  
by appropriate dealer personnel.  
Courtesy Rental Vehicle  
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy  
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle  
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty  
repair. If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please  
see your dealer for the maximum number of days  
allowed and the allowance per rental day. Rental  
reimbursement must be supported by original receipts.  
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,  
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at  
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility  
pursuant to the terms and conditions described  
herein at its sole discretion.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety  
performance, however, the history of these parts is not  
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures  
are not covered by that warranty.  
Collision Damage Repair  
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is  
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified  
technician using the proper equipment and quality  
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs  
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety  
performance can be compromised in subsequent  
collisions.  
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are  
made by companies other than GM and may not have  
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may  
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,  
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.  
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related  
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.  
Collision Parts  
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with  
the same materials and construction methods as  
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.  
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice  
to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,  
durability and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine  
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle  
Warranty.  
Repair Facility  
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair  
facility that meets your needs before you ever need  
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a  
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians  
and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend  
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians  
and comparable equipment.  
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for  
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles  
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,  
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections  
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM  
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Insuring Your Vehicle  
If a Crash Occurs  
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with  
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.  
There are significant differences in the quality of  
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.  
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to  
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage  
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some  
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision  
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that  
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original  
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage  
is not available from your current insurance carrier,  
consider switching to another insurance carrier.  
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.  
Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all  
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else  
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.  
If there has been an injury, call emergency services  
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all  
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle  
only if its position puts you in danger or you are  
instructed to move it by a police officer.  
Give only the necessary and requested information  
to police and other parties involved in the crash.  
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame  
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will  
help guard against post-crash legal action.  
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may  
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with  
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)  
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.  
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged  
at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.  
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside  
Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-7 for  
more information.  
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the  
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the  
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,  
the service’s name, and the phone number.  
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is  
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance  
information and registration if you keep these items  
in your vehicle.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gather the important information you will need from  
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone  
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license  
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and  
policy number, and a general description of the  
damage to the other vehicle.  
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair  
Process  
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,  
GM recommends that you take an active role in its  
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of  
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.  
Specify to the facility that any required replacement  
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new  
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.  
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by  
your GM vehicle warranty.  
If possible, call your insurance company from the  
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the  
information they will need. If they ask for a police  
report, phone or go to the police department  
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy  
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/  
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report  
may not be necessary. This is especially true if there  
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.  
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live  
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your  
insurance company may initially value the repair using  
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair  
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember  
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the  
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your  
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.  
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your  
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer  
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,  
make sure you are comfortable with them.  
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable  
with their work for a long time.  
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the  
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair  
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision  
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with  
that company. In such cases, you can have control of  
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within  
reasonable limits.  
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and  
make sure you understand what work will be  
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,  
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome  
this opportunity.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle  
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236  
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;  
or write to:  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
United States Government  
Administrator, NHTSA  
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.  
Washington D.C., 20590  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which  
could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)  
in addition to notifying General Motors.  
You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
Canadian Government  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may  
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety  
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may  
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,  
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual  
problems between you, your dealer/retailer,  
or General Motors.  
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your  
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada  
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of  
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:  
Transport Canada  
Road Safety Branch  
2780 Sheffield Road  
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reporting Safety Defects to  
General Motors  
Service Publications Ordering  
Information  
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a  
situation like this, please notify General Motors.  
Service Manuals  
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair  
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,  
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.  
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:  
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center  
Cadillac Motor Car Division  
P.O. Box 33169  
Service Bulletins  
Detroit, MI 48232-5169  
Service Bulletins give additional technical service  
information needed to knowledgeably service  
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains  
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service  
of your vehicle.  
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:  
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,  
CA1-163-005  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Owner Information  
Owner publications are written specifically for owners  
and intended to provide basic operational information  
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the  
Maintenance Schedule for all models.  
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and  
Warranty Booklet.  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee  
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Current and Past Model Order Forms  
Vehicle Data Recording and  
Privacy  
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available  
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request  
an order form, specify year and model name of  
the vehicle.  
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated  
computers that record information about the vehicle’s  
performance and how it is driven. For example, your  
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control  
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the  
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags  
in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking  
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules  
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician  
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data  
about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel  
consumption or average speed. These modules may also  
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio  
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.  
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123  
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM  
Eastern Time  
For Credit Card Orders Only  
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.  
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com  
Or you can write to:  
Helm, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 07130  
Detroit, MI 48207  
Prices are subject to change without notice and without  
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.  
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are  
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make  
checks payable in U.S. funds.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle  
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is  
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and  
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash  
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law  
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type  
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a  
crash investigation.  
Event Data Recorders  
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).  
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain  
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag  
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist  
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.  
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle  
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,  
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is  
designed to record such data as:  
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment  
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR  
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,  
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the  
special equipment, can read the information if they have  
access to the vehicle or the EDR.  
How various systems in your vehicle were operating  
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts  
were buckled/fastened  
GM will not access this data or share it with others  
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the  
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in  
response to an official request of police or similar  
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation  
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.  
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for  
GM research needs or may be made available to others  
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the  
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.  
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the  
accelerator and/or brake pedal  
How fast the vehicle was traveling  
This data can help provide a better understanding of the  
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar®  
Radio Frequency  
Identification (RFID)  
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the  
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms  
and Conditions for information on data collection and  
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-51 in  
this manual for more information.  
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions  
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system  
security, as well as in connection with conveniences  
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and  
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door  
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use  
or record personal information or link with any other  
GM system containing personal information.  
Navigation System  
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the  
system may result in the storage of destinations,  
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip  
information. Refer to the navigation system operating  
manual for information on stored data and for deletion  
instructions.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bluetooth® .................................................... 3-116  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving (cont.)  
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-23  
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-22  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel (cont.)  
F
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K
Keyless Entry, Remote Operation ........................ 2-5  
StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-58  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-22  
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-51  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer  
Bluetooth® ................................................ 3-116  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ... 2-5  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ............................... 3-58  
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-22  
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield (cont.)  
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-50  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Beko Washer 2820523327_FL User Manual
Belkin Network Router A F5D7130 User Manual
Bloomfield Coffeemaker 9600 Single Cup User Manual
Brother Printer HL 1000 User Manual
Bush Hog Lawn Mower RDTH60 User Manual
Cables to Go Switch 89035 User Manual
Casio Digital Camera EX Z12 User Manual
Cecilware Coffeemaker BC2 IT User Manual
Cecilware Food Warmer SW 11 User Manual
Charnwood Fire Pit FIREPIT User Manual